{"title":"All Products","description":null,"products":[{"product_id":"long-handle-toe-nail-scissors","title":"Long Handle Toe Nail Scissors","description":"\u003ch2\u003eLong Handle Toe Nail Scissors\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese \u003cstrong\u003eLong Handle Toe Nail Scissors\u003c\/strong\u003e are designed to provide extra reach for routine toenail trimming when ordinary nail scissors are difficult to position. The extended handle reduces how far the hand needs to travel toward the feet, while the angled cutting head helps bring the blades into a more practical position around the nail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey can be useful for people who find bending at the hips or reaching the feet awkward, particularly when nail care is carried out from a stable seated position. The longer reach does not remove the need for good visibility and hand control, so the user should still be able to see the nail clearly and guide the blades safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eExtra Reach Without a Powered Mechanism\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe simple manual design avoids batteries or motorised parts. Instead, the benefit comes from extending the distance between the user's hand and the cutting head, which can make basic foot care more accessible without adding a complicated mechanism.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe comfort-grip handles are intended to provide controlled operation, while the angled blades reduce the need to hold the scissors at the same steep angle as a short grooming tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBest for Routine Nail Care\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese scissors are intended for ordinary toenail trimming. Very thick, distorted, damaged or painful nails may be difficult or unsafe to cut with standard scissors and should not be forced.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ePeople with diabetes, significantly reduced sensation, circulation concerns or other conditions that make foot injury more consequential should follow their usual professional foot-care advice rather than relying on a long-handled tool alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCleaning and Storage\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eKeep the blades clean and dry after use and inspect the hinge and handles before trimming. Personal grooming tools are best kept for individual use unless they are appropriately cleaned between users.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore the scissors where the cutting edges cannot be contacted accidentally and keep them away from children.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtended handle\u003c\/strong\u003e for easier reach to the feet.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAngled blades\u003c\/strong\u003e help position the cutting edge at the toenail.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eComfort-grip handles for controlled everyday use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight manual grooming aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for seated nail-care routines where the user can safely see and control the blades.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are these scissors designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey are designed for routine toenail trimming with more reach than standard nail scissors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the long handle help?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt reduces how far the hand needs to reach toward the foot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy are the blades angled?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe angled cutting head helps bring the blades into a more practical position around the toenail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan they be used while seated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the user has a stable seated position and can clearly see and control the cutting area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre they powered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. They are manual scissors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre they suitable for fingernails?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey are primarily intended for toenails, where extra reach is most useful.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan they trim very thick nails?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eVery thick, distorted or damaged nails may require a more suitable nail tool or professional foot-care advice rather than forcing the scissors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre they suitable if I have reduced sensation in my feet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eExtra caution is needed where sensation is reduced. Follow any foot-care guidance you have been given, particularly if a small cut or skin injury could be difficult to detect.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the blades be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Wipe and dry the blades after use and keep the scissors clean between users.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the scissors be shared?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor hygiene, personal grooming tools are best kept for individual use unless they are appropriately cleaned between users.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should I check before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMake sure the blades and handle are secure, clean and moving normally.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Long Handle Toe Nail Scissors available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. These grooming scissors are available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLong-reach toenail scissors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCutting head\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAngled blades\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExtended comfort-grip design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848300107,"sku":"MS-TOENLSS","price":24.5,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/c7ab6ac1-e674b4_ab6e22a78f804aba8929970dca8fe4b5_mv2.webp?v=1754901806"},{"product_id":"gf-economy-transit-wheelchair","title":"GF Economy Transit Wheelchair","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Economy Transit Wheelchair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Economy Transit Wheelchair\u003c\/strong\u003e is a straightforward attendant-propelled wheelchair with a durable \u003cstrong\u003esteel folding frame\u003c\/strong\u003e and black powder-coated finish. It provides a budget-friendly alternative to the Goldfern Premium and Lightweight transit models for everyday home, appointment and community use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe chair has black nylon upholstery, fixed padded armrests and removable swing-away plastic footrests. Its folding frame helps reduce the space required for storage and suitable vehicle transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe chair weighs \u003cstrong\u003e11.65 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and supports a maximum user weight of \u003cstrong\u003e136 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. Its seat measures \u003cstrong\u003e45.7 × 40.6 cm (18 × 16\")\u003c\/strong\u003e, with \u003cstrong\u003e15.2 cm (6\") solid rubber front wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e20.3 cm (8\") solid rubber rear wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDurable steel folding frame\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBlack powder-coated finish\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBlack nylon upholstery\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFixed padded armrests\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRemovable swing-away plastic footrests\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTransit wheelchair format\u003c\/strong\u003e intended primarily for attendant propulsion.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFolds for more convenient storage and suitable vehicle transport.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBudget-friendly alternative to the Premium and Lightweight Goldfern transit wheelchairs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Economy Transit Wheelchair?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis model focuses on the essential features of an attendant-propelled wheelchair without the additional adjustments or lighter aluminium construction of Goldfern's higher-specification models. The steel folding frame is well suited to users who want a simple, practical transit wheelchair at an accessible price point.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the Right Wheelchair Fit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eGF Economy Transit Wheelchair should be matched to the user’s seated dimensions, transfer method and the way the chair will be propelled. Seat width needs to provide comfortable clearance without leaving the user unsupported, while seat depth, footrest position and arm height affect posture over longer periods. For attendant-propelled models, the caregiver should also be able to reach the handles and brakes comfortably.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasure doorways, vehicle storage and turning space as well as the user. Removable or swing-away components can simplify transfers and transport, but they should be refitted and secured before travel. Wheelchairs used for extended sitting may require an individually selected cushion or clinical seating assessment, particularly where posture or pressure-care needs are present.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is a transit wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA transit wheelchair is primarily pushed by an attendant and uses smaller rear wheels than a self-propelled wheelchair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this wheelchair designed for self-propelling?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. This is the transit version and is intended primarily for attendant propulsion. For user self-propelling, a self-propelled wheelchair with large rear wheels is more suitable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the frame made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Economy Transit Wheelchair uses a durable steel frame with a black powder-coated finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the frame fold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The frame folds to reduce the space needed for storage and suitable vehicle transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat type of upholstery does it use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe chair uses black nylon upholstery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the armrests adjustable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. This Economy model uses fixed padded armrests.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo the footrests swing away?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The plastic footrests swing away and can be removed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it differ from the Economy Self-Propelled Wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Economy Transit is designed to be pushed by an attendant, while the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/economy-self-propelled-wheelchair\"\u003eEconomy Self-Propelled\u003c\/a\u003e model uses large rear wheels that allow the seated user to propel the chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it differ from the Lightweight Transit Wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Economy Transit uses a steel frame. The Lightweight Transit uses a lighter aluminium frame and adds features such as a folding backrest, quick-release rear wheels and published AS\/NZS testing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for occasional transport and appointments?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its folding transit design is practical for many everyday home, appointment and community mobility situations, provided the chair suits the user's seating and support needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size are the seat and overall dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe seat measures 45.7 × 40.6 cm (18 × 16\"). Goldfern lists the overall dimensions as 60.5 × 91 × 73 cm. If a specific doorway or vehicle fit is critical, contact MoveSmart to confirm the required measurement before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the wheelchair weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe net chair weight is 11.65 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe maximum user weight is 136 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size and type are the wheels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe front wheels are 15.2 cm (6\") and the rear wheels are 20.3 cm (8\"). Both use solid rubber tyres.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty does Goldfern list?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGoldfern lists a 12-month warranty for this model.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Economy Transit Wheelchair is available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheelchair type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAttendant-propelled transit wheelchair\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFolding steel frame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame finish\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack powder coat\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUpholstery\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBlack nylon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eArmrests\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixed and padded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFootrests\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemovable, swing-away plastic footrests\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFront wheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15.2 cm (6\") solid rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRear wheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20.3 cm (8\") solid rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45.7 × 40.6 cm (18 × 16\")\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNet chair weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e11.65 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e136 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60.5 × 91 × 73 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848267339,"sku":"GF-ECNTRNSWC","price":329.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/85641648-e674b4_03d0eaa61ba14583817a080175ff3e90_mv2.png?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"adjustable-standing-aid-support-with-handle","title":"Adjustable Standing Aid Support with Handle","description":"\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable Standing Aid Support with Handle\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable Standing Aid Support with Handle\u003c\/strong\u003e gives the user a stable handhold to push from during suitable sit-to-stand movements. It can be positioned beside a chair, sofa or bed where the layout allows a secure setup, providing two grip points rather than relying on furniture arms or other improvised surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThree height settings — \u003cstrong\u003e41 cm, 51 cm and 61 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e — allow the support to be matched more closely to the furniture and user. The compact frame is light enough to reposition around the home, while non-slip grips and a non-slip base help provide a more secure point of support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eDesigned to Assist, Not Lift\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is a manual standing aid rather than a powered lifting device. The user still needs to participate in the movement and have enough balance and strength to stand safely while using the handles for leverage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat makes it most useful for someone who can already stand with support but finds it difficult to get enough purchase from a low chair, sofa or bedside position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwo Handle Heights for Better Leverage\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe dual-handle design gives the user a choice of grip positions during the movement. One hand can begin lower and move to the higher handle as the body rises, or both hands can use whichever position feels most secure.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe entire aid can also be set to one of three overall heights without tools, helping align the handles with different furniture heights.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree height settings:\u003c\/strong\u003e 41 cm, 51 cm and 61 cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDual handles\u003c\/strong\u003e provide two grip positions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-slip handgrips.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-slip base for use on a suitable stable floor.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact and lightweight for repositioning around the home.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTool-free height adjustment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSetting It Up Safely\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe support should sit on a firm floor where the base cannot slide or rock, and the surrounding chair or bed must also remain stable when the user pushes through the handles. Avoid placing it where the frame creates a trip hazard or where rolling furniture could move unexpectedly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf a person needs substantial lifting assistance, cannot maintain balance or is unsure whether this type of aid is appropriate, a different transfer solution may be safer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat height settings are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe support can be set to approximately 41 cm, 51 cm or 61 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy are there two handles?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe dual-handle design provides two hand positions for controlled leverage during a suitable sit-to-stand movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it need tools for adjustment?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The current design uses tool-free height adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used beside a chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, where the chair, floor and support can be positioned securely without creating a trip or tipping hazard.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used beside a bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be used where the bedside layout allows a stable setup and the user can transfer safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it lift a person automatically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a manual standing support and does not lift the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for every person who struggles to stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Suitability depends on balance, strength, cognition, furniture and transfer technique. If standing is unsafe or uncertain, seek appropriate mobility or rehabilitation advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat floor surfaces are suitable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse it only where the base remains stable and does not slide. Always test the setup before putting significant force through the handles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the furniture also be stable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Do not use the aid beside furniture that moves, tips or rolls unexpectedly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be moved between rooms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its compact lightweight design is intended to make repositioning straightforward.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should be checked before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eConfirm the height adjustment is locked, the base is stable and the grips and frame are undamaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Adjustable Standing Aid available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This standing aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight settings\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e41 cm; 51 cm; 61 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandle style\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDual handle\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-slip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdjustment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTool-free\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848332875,"sku":"MS-SAWTHHDL","price":149.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/555a6e42-e674b4_8329459df3ff4ce5865628d5b97b6582_mv2.png?v=1754901806"},{"product_id":"food-tray","title":"Food Tray","description":"\u003ch2\u003eClip-On Bamboo Food Tray\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis \u003cstrong\u003eClip-On Bamboo Food Tray\u003c\/strong\u003e creates a compact temporary surface over a suitable sofa arm or soft rollator seat. Its flexible folding bamboo slats wrap over the supporting surface, giving you a convenient place for light everyday items such as a drink, snack plate, phone, book or remote without needing a separate freestanding table.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause it is removable and folds down when not in use, the tray is particularly useful where space is limited or where a permanent tray is unnecessary. It can move between compatible furniture and mobility equipment as needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUseful on a Sofa Arm or Compatible Soft-Seat Rollator\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eOn a broad sofa arm, the tray creates a flatter surface over upholstery that would otherwise be difficult to use for a cup or plate. On a compatible rollator with a soft seat, it can provide a small stationary tabletop when the walker is parked and the brakes are applied.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be useful with suitable soft-seat rollators such as the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.movesmart.nz\/products\/goldfern-x-fold-rollator\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\"\u003eGoldfern X-FOLD\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.movesmart.nz\/products\/byacre-carbon-ultralight-walker\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\"\u003ebyACRE Carbon Ultralight\u003c\/a\u003e, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.movesmart.nz\/products\/uplivin-trive-walker-rollator\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\"\u003eUplivin Trive\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/www.movesmart.nz\/products\/liberator-heavy-duty-foldable-walker\" target=\"_blank\" rel=\"noopener\"\u003eAMW Liberator\u003c\/a\u003e, provided the tray sits securely on the individual setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Fit Matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tray depends on the shape and width of the surface beneath it rather than permanent fixings. Sofa arms and rollator seats vary substantially, so the tray should sit flat enough that whatever is placed on it remains stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBefore using it with food, drinks or valuables, test the empty tray first. On a rollator, apply the parking brakes and keep the walker stationary. The tray should never be used as a handhold or body-weight support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFolding Bamboo Construction\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bamboo slats create a firm top while remaining flexible enough to wrap over a suitable support. When the tray is no longer needed, the slatted construction folds down for compact storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor cleaning, wipe the bamboo with a lightly damp cloth and dry it promptly. Avoid soaking the wood or leaving standing moisture on the surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBamboo construction\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFlexible clip-on \/ wrap-over design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eProvides a temporary surface for light everyday items.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be used on suitable sofa arms.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan also sit over compatible soft rollator seats.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFolds down for compact storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo permanent fixings or powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the tray made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe tray is made from bamboo slats joined in a flexible folding format.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it fit a sofa arm?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe flexible tray wraps over a suitable sofa arm and rests on the supporting surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on a rollator?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, on a suitable soft-seat rollator where the tray can sit securely and remain level enough for the intended item.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it permanently attached?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a removable tray and requires no permanent fitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it fold for storage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The slatted design folds down when the tray is not required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat can I put on it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is suitable for light everyday items such as a cup, snack plate, phone or remote when the tray is stable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I put very hot cookware on it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAvoid placing very hot cookware directly on the bamboo unless an appropriate heat-resistant barrier is used.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it fit every sofa arm?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Sofa-arm width, shape and upholstery vary. Check that the tray has enough stable contact before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it fit every rollator?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is best suited to soft-seat rollators with enough supporting area. Test the fit before loading the tray.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the rollator brakes be locked while using it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. If using the tray on a rollator, apply the parking brakes and keep the rollator stationary.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used as a transfer support?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The tray is a surface for light items and should never be leaned on for body-weight support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the bamboo be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe it with a lightly damp cloth and dry it promptly. Avoid soaking the bamboo.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Clip-On Bamboo Food Tray available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This tray is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBamboo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDesign\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlexible folding \/ wrap-over tray\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTypical use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSuitable sofa arms or compatible soft rollator seats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInstallation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemovable; no permanent fitting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848365643,"sku":"MS-FTBLK","price":75.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/93dcb5de-e674b4_4295208fa27c41789101e565d5eed38b_mv2.webp?v=1754901806"},{"product_id":"prestige-electric-reclining-lift-chair-grey","title":"Prestige Electric Reclining Lift Chair - Grey","description":"\u003ch2\u003ePrestige Electric Reclining Lift Chair – Grey Fabric\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ePrestige Electric Reclining Lift Chair – Grey\u003c\/strong\u003e combines powered rise-and-recline assistance with separate powered headrest and lumbar adjustment, plus built-in heat and vibration massage. It is designed for everyday home use where the user wants help moving from sitting toward standing as well as more adjustable comfort than a basic lift recliner provides.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis version uses \u003cstrong\u003esoft grey fabric upholstery\u003c\/strong\u003e. The chair has a \u003cstrong\u003e125 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e and an approximate product weight of \u003cstrong\u003e50 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePowered Lift Assistance for Sit-to-Stand\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe chair's lift mechanism raises and tilts the seat forward to reduce the effort required to move from sitting toward standing. The user still needs an appropriate transfer technique and enough stability to stand safely once their feet are positioned.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCorrect chair fit matters. If the seat is too high, too low, too deep or too wide for the user, even a powered lift mechanism may not provide the intended support. Where transfer needs are complex, occupational-therapy or physiotherapy advice can help with chair selection and setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eElectric Recline with Powered Headrest and Lumbar Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePowered recline allows the chair to move into a range of more relaxed sitting positions. Separate powered \u003cstrong\u003eheadrest\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003elumbar\u003c\/strong\u003e adjustments make it possible to change upper-back, neck and lower-back support without relying on loose cushions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis extra adjustment can be particularly useful as the chair moves from upright sitting into a deeper recline, because the preferred head and lumbar support often changes with body angle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHeat and Vibration Massage\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current Grey model includes \u003cstrong\u003elumbar heating and vibration massage\u003c\/strong\u003e. These are comfort features rather than clinical treatment functions, and users should follow individual health advice if heat or vibration may not be appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe functions are controlled from the chair's handset along with the powered seating adjustments.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGrey Fabric or Brown PU?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart also lists a Brown PU Prestige model with the same core powered functions. Choose the \u003cstrong\u003eGrey Fabric\u003c\/strong\u003e version when a softer textile finish is preferred; choose the \u003cstrong\u003eBrown PU\u003c\/strong\u003e version when a leather-look, wipe-friendly surface better suits the user or room.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause these are older unlisted MoveSmart models, availability should be confirmed before relying on a particular upholstery option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eRoom Placement and Fit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Prestige needs clear space around and behind the chair for its lift and recline movement. Keep the area underneath free of objects, cords and pets, and make sure the mechanism cannot contact walls or nearby furniture.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe packaged dimensions are approximately \u003cstrong\u003e80 x 80 x 70 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Contact MoveSmart if seat width, seat depth, floor-to-seat height or overall open dimensions are important so the current chair can be measured before purchase.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowered lift assistance\u003c\/strong\u003e for sit-to-stand support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eElectric recline\u003c\/strong\u003e for adjustable resting positions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowered headrest adjustment\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePowered lumbar-support adjustment\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLumbar heating\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVibration massage\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHandheld remote control.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSoft grey fabric upholstery\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e125 kg listed maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e50 kg chair weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWho Is the Prestige Grey Best Suited To?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits someone who wants a powered lift recliner for everyday home use and values independent headrest and lumbar adjustment together with heat and massage comfort features. The grey fabric gives the chair a softer lounge-chair finish than the Brown PU version.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUsers who need higher capacity, multiple seat sizes, zero-gravity positioning or more advanced powered functions should also compare MoveSmart's newer Goldfern and Theorem lift-chair ranges.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the lift function do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt raises and tilts the chair forward to assist the transition from sitting toward standing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the chair recline electrically?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Recline is powered and controlled from the handset.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the headrest be adjusted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Grey model includes powered headrest adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the lumbar support be adjusted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Lumbar support is powered and can be changed from the controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes this model include heat and massage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The current Grey model includes lumbar heating and vibration massage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre heat and massage medical treatments?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. They are comfort features. Follow individual medical advice if heat or vibration may not be appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current product information lists 125 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the chair weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 50 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between Grey and Brown PU?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe main difference is upholstery. Grey uses a soft fabric finish, while Brown PU provides a leather-look wipe-friendly surface. The listed powered functions are otherwise similar.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the 80 x 80 x 70 cm dimensions the chair size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Those are packaged dimensions. Contact MoveSmart if exact seat and overall chair measurements are required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much room does it need?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAllow enough clear space for the chair to complete both lift and recline movement without contacting walls, furniture or other objects.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Prestige Lift Chair available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. MoveSmart can arrange delivery of lift chairs to customers across New Zealand. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/pages\/contact\"\u003eGet in touch\u003c\/a\u003e if you would like help confirming chair size, availability or delivery arrangements before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUpholstery\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey fabric\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 50 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFunctions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePower lift, electric recline, powered headrest, powered lumbar support, lumbar heat, vibration massage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eControl\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHandheld remote\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePackaged dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 80 x 80 x 70 cm; not seating dimensions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"AMW","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848529483,"sku":"AMW-PRSTGLFTCHR-GRYHM","price":1499.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/aa9ad772-e674b4_32715753e92f48db969f0c399ef11c85_mv2.png?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"freiheit-x4-carbon-fibre-rollator","title":"Freiheit X4 Carbon Fibre Rollator","description":"\u003ch2\u003eFreiheit X4 Carbon Fibre Rollator\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eFreiheit X4\u003c\/strong\u003e is the lighter, more premium everyday rollator in the Freiheit range. Its carbon-fibre frame brings product weight down to approximately \u003cstrong\u003e6.7 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e while retaining a \u003cstrong\u003e130 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e, built-in seat, back support and removable shopping bag.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eLarge \u003cstrong\u003e22.9 cm (9\") TPR rubber-tread wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e give it a little more rolling capability than the aluminium X3 while keeping the puncture-free, low-maintenance character of a solid-tyre rollator.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhere the X4 Fits in the Freiheit Range\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe X4 is the best match for someone who likes the X3 concept but wants lower carrying weight, carbon-fibre construction and slightly larger wheels. Compared with the \u003cstrong\u003eFreiheit X3\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is about 0.5 kg lighter and moves from 20.3 cm (8\") to 22.9 cm (9\") wheels. Compared with the \u003cstrong\u003eFreedom Stroller XC\u003c\/strong\u003e, it remains much lighter and lower-maintenance because it uses solid TPR wheels rather than large pneumatic tyres.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor normal footpaths, shopping areas and stable community surfaces, the X4 offers a strong balance between portability and outdoor capability. For frequent grass, gravel or rougher tracks, the XC remains the more specialised option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCarbon Fibre for Easier Lifting\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAt approximately \u003cstrong\u003e6.7 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, the X4 is easier to lift into a vehicle than many conventional aluminium or steel rollators. The frame folds to around \u003cstrong\u003e23 cm wide\u003c\/strong\u003e, helping with boot storage and use in tighter storage spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSeat, Storage and Braking\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe seat is approximately \u003cstrong\u003e64 cm high\u003c\/strong\u003e and includes back support for stationary rest breaks. A removable front bag carries up to \u003cstrong\u003e5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe hand brakes provide normal stopping control while walking and can be locked into parking mode before sitting. A step pedal assists with suitable small kerbs and thresholds.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarbon-fibre frame\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApprox. 6.7 kg product weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e130 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHandle height approximately \u003cstrong\u003e76.8–97.2 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeat height approximately \u003cstrong\u003e64 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e22.9 cm (9\") TPR rubber-tread wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStopping and parking brake modes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eErgonomic height-adjustable handles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRemovable textile shopping bag with 5 kg capacity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeat and back support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStep pedal for suitable small kerbs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSafety reflectors.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFolds to approximately 23 cm wide.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCurrent colours: \u003cstrong\u003eBlack, White and Charcoal\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube-nocookie.com\/embed\/-VfTD5hdR8Y?si=00KizLVf4QScqMvC\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Freiheit X4 best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who want a premium lightweight rollator for everyday indoor and outdoor use and value easier vehicle lifting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the X4 different from the X3?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe X4 uses carbon fibre, weighs about 6.7 kg and has 22.9 cm (9\") wheels. The X3 uses aluminium, weighs about 7.2 kg and has 20.3 cm (8\") wheels.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the Freedom Stroller XC?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe XC is a heavier rough-terrain model with 31 cm pneumatic tyres. The X4 is lighter and better suited to normal stable surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e130 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the X4 weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 6.7 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the handle-height range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 76.8–97.2 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size are the wheels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e22.9 cm (9\") TPR rubber-tread wheels.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the seat be used while moving?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Use the seat only while the rollator is stationary with the parking brakes applied.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much can the shopping bag hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to 5 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow narrow is it when folded?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 23 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable outdoors?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, on suitable flat and stable outdoor surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat colours are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBlack, White and Charcoal, subject to availability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered NZ-wide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. MoveSmart ships the Freiheit X4 throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarbon fibre\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.7 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 60.5 × L 72 × H 76.8–97.2 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e64 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFolded size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 23 × L 72 × H 86 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTurning radius\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e84 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22.9 cm (9\") TPR rubber tread\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBag capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Freiheit","offers":[{"title":"Black","offer_id":41676848660555,"sku":"CUB-FHX4CFRLLTR-BLK","price":899.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"White","offer_id":41676848693323,"sku":"CUB-FHX4CFRLLTR-WHT","price":899.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Charcoal","offer_id":41676848726091,"sku":"CUB-FHX4CFRLLTR-CHR","price":899.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/f62bd1b0-e674b4_d91e3e259dcb49458eaab7bd29ac0bf4_mv2.jpg?v=1754901806"},{"product_id":"long-handle-shoe-horn-and-dressing-aid","title":"Long Handle Shoe Horn and Dressing Aid","description":"\u003ch2\u003e3-in-1 Long Handle Shoe Horn and Dressing Aid\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eLong Handle Shoe Horn and Dressing Aid\u003c\/strong\u003e combines three common dressing functions in one adjustable tool: a long shoe horn, dressing hook and sock-removal aid. The handle extends from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e57 cm to 90 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving the user extra reach while seated or standing and reducing how far the hand needs to travel toward the feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is a useful everyday option for people who find bending, reaching or managing clothing around the lower legs awkward. Because the same tool can help with shoes, garments and sock removal, it can reduce the need to keep several separate long-handled dressing aids nearby.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable Reach for Different Dressing Tasks\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe telescoping length lets the user shorten the aid when working closer to the body or extend it when more reach is needed. That flexibility can be useful when moving between a chair, bed and standing dressing routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor safer use, choose a stable seated position whenever balance is uncertain. The dressing aid is not designed to support body weight and should never be leaned on like a walking stick or grab rail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThree Useful Ends in One Tool\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe shoe-horn end helps guide the heel into suitable footwear without requiring the hand to reach all the way to the shoe. The dressing hook can help position compatible garments, loops or straps, while the shaped sock-removal end can help ease a sock down the lower leg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eGarment and footwear shapes vary, so the tool should be used gently. Avoid forcing the hook or shoe horn where it could snag delicate fabric, damage footwear or scrape the skin.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompact for Storage and Travel\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe reinforced ABS construction keeps the tool lightweight, and the detachable format makes it easier to pack or store when not in use. Smooth rounded surfaces help reduce snagging on clothing during normal use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3-in-1 design:\u003c\/strong\u003e shoe horn, dressing aid and sock remover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable length from 57–90 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDetachable construction for storage and travel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight reinforced ABS plastic.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSmooth rounded surfaces to reduce snagging on clothing.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManual, non-powered daily-living aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat three functions does the tool provide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt combines a long shoe horn, dressing hook and sock-removal aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the adjustable length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe handle adjusts from approximately 57 cm to 90 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used while seated?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The adjustable length can be set for a stable seated dressing position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used while standing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the user is stable and does not need to lean or balance unsafely while dressing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the shoe horn end help?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt helps guide the heel into a shoe without requiring the hand to reach all the way to the foot.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat can the dressing hook be used for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can help guide suitable garments, straps or clothing edges into position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it used to remove socks?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe shaped end can help catch the upper edge of a sock and guide it down the leg where the sock and user's skin allow comfortable use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is it made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current product uses lightweight reinforced ABS plastic.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it come apart for storage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its detachable design makes it easier to store or pack.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it require tools to adjust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo tools are required for normal assembly and adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it work with every type of shoe or clothing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Footwear and garment shapes vary, so use it only where the shaped ends can engage the item without forcing or snagging it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it a weight-bearing aid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a dressing tool and must not be used as a cane, grab rail or transfer support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Long Handle Shoe Horn and Dressing Aid available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This dressing aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFunctions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eShoe horn; dressing hook; sock remover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdjustable length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e57–90 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReinforced ABS plastic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDetachable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848431179,"sku":"MS-SHLNG","price":35.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/c03c47b8-e674b4_0f3a521b94b84379bb6d84f061f18335_mv2.webp?v=1754901806"},{"product_id":"patient-transfer-slide-sheet","title":"Patient Transfer Slide Sheet","description":"\u003ch2\u003eLow-Friction Patient Transfer Slide Sheet\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ePatient Transfer Slide Sheet\u003c\/strong\u003e is a reusable low-friction repositioning aid made from lightweight nylon. Its endless tube-style construction allows one layer to glide over the other, reducing the friction between the person and the supporting surface during suitable in-bed repositioning and assisted movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart currently offers three sizes — \u003cstrong\u003e95 x 75 cm, 135 x 75 cm and 150 x 75 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e — so the working area can be matched more closely to the intended repositioning task and user.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis type of low-friction transfer sheet is also commonly searched for as a \u003cstrong\u003eSlippery Sam\u003c\/strong\u003e or \u003cstrong\u003eSlippery Sam slide sheet\u003c\/strong\u003e. The name is often used conversationally for slide sheets.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eHow a Tube Slide Sheet Works\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe sheet forms a continuous loop rather than a single flat layer. When positioned correctly, the two low-friction nylon surfaces move against each other, allowing a person to be repositioned with less drag than moving directly against the bed linen.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe slide sheet does not lift or suspend the user. Its role is to reduce friction as part of an appropriate moving-and-handling technique.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the Right Size\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe three available sizes provide different amounts of working area. A smaller sheet may be easier to position for a more localised movement, while a longer sheet provides greater coverage where a larger section of the body needs to move.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe correct choice depends on the person, bed, task and technique rather than simply selecting the largest option. Excess loose material can be awkward to manage, while a sheet that is too small may not provide enough low-friction surface for the intended movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFor Repositioning Rather Than General Transfers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSlide sheets are most commonly used to help with repositioning in bed, such as moving a person higher up the mattress or adjusting their position. They are not a substitute for a transfer board, standing aid, hoist or sling where a different type of transfer is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe appropriate number of carers and the movement technique depend on the user and their care plan. If manual handling is uncertain, follow relevant professional guidance rather than improvising a technique.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eReusable Lightweight Nylon\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lightweight nylon is breathable and quick drying, making the sheet practical for repeated care use. Inspect the material and seams before each use and stop using it if the fabric, stitching or low-friction surface becomes damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLow-friction tube design\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSlip-coated inner surfaces allow the layers to glide over each other.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight nylon construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBreathable, quick-drying fabric.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree current size options:\u003c\/strong\u003e 95 x 75 cm, 135 x 75 cm and 150 x 75 cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReusable care and repositioning aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for use only with an appropriate transfer or repositioning technique.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the slide sheet used for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is used to reduce friction during suitable repositioning or assisted movement, particularly in bed.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat sizes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCurrent variants are 95 x 75 cm, 135 x 75 cm and 150 x 75 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does tube-style mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe sheet forms an endless loop, allowing one nylon layer to slide over the other during movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is it made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe current product uses lightweight nylon with low-friction inner surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the slide sheet lift a person?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It reduces friction but is not a hoist, sling or weight-bearing lifting device.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan one person always use it alone?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The number of carers required depends on the person, movement and care plan. Use the appropriate manual-handling technique for the situation.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for every type of transfer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Slide sheets are primarily repositioning aids. Other transfers may require a transfer board, hoist or different equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShould it be left under a person after repositioning?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eOnly if the relevant care procedure specifically allows it. Low-friction material can affect stability, so it is normally removed when the task is complete.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow should the correct size be chosen?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose a size that provides enough working area for the intended repositioning technique without creating excess loose material.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the nylon quick drying?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The current material is described as breathable and quick drying.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShould the sheet be inspected before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Do not use it if the fabric, seams or low-friction surface are damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in home care?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, where the person and carer have an appropriate repositioning technique and the product suits the task.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Patient Transfer Slide Sheet available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. All current size variants are available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this transfer sheet a Slippery Sam?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e“Slippery Sam” is commonly used as a search term for low-friction patient slide sheets. This product is MoveSmart’s Patient Transfer Slide Sheet, supplied in three sizes. Choose it by the required dimensions, tube-style construction and intended repositioning technique.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eEndless tube-style slide sheet\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLightweight nylon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrent sizes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e95 x 75 cm; 135 x 75 cm; 150 x 75 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary function\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReduce friction during suitable repositioning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWeight-bearing lifting aid\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"95 x 75cm","offer_id":42207039881291,"sku":"MS-PTSSGRN-1","price":35.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"135 x 75cm","offer_id":42207039914059,"sku":"MS-PTSSGRN-2","price":35.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"150 x 75cm","offer_id":42207039946827,"sku":"MS-PTSSGRN-3","price":35.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/main-image-4.jpg?v=1773436863"},{"product_id":"goldfern-narrow-premium-rollator","title":"Goldfern Narrow Premium Rollator","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Narrow Premium Rollator\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Narrow Premium Rollator\u003c\/strong\u003e is the compact indoor-focused model in Goldfern's Premium rollator range. At approximately \u003cstrong\u003e55 cm overall width\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is designed for hallways, smaller rooms and tighter spaces where a standard-width rollator can feel bulky, while still providing a padded seat, back support and under-seat storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe aluminium frame weighs approximately \u003cstrong\u003e8.7 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, supports users up to \u003cstrong\u003e127 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and uses 20.3 cm (8\") wheels with locking hand brakes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhere the Narrow Premium Fits in the Goldfern Range\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the Narrow Premium when compact width matters more than minimum carrying weight. It is only around \u003cstrong\u003e55 cm wide overall\u003c\/strong\u003e, with approximately \u003cstrong\u003e38 cm between the arms\u003c\/strong\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/goldfern-x-fold-mini-rollator\"\u003eX-FOLD Mini\u003c\/a\u003e is slightly narrower overall and much lighter, while the Narrow Premium provides a more traditional padded-seat Premium-rollator setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor users needing substantially more width or capacity, the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/heavy-duty-premium-rollator\"\u003eHeavy Duty Premium\u003c\/a\u003e is the better comparison.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eDesigned for Tighter Indoor Spaces\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe compact frame can be easier to manoeuvre through narrow hallways, around furniture and in smaller rooms. Because doorways and bathroom layouts vary, it is still worth checking the 55 cm overall width against the intended environment before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSeat, Storage and Braking\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe padded seat measures approximately \u003cstrong\u003e34 × 30.5 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e and sits around \u003cstrong\u003e51 cm high\u003c\/strong\u003e. A padded back bar provides support during stationary rest breaks.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA removable nylon carry bag sits beneath the seat. Handle-mounted brakes can be used for slowing and locked into parking mode before sitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e55 cm compact overall width\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e38 cm width between the arms\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e127 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e8.7 kg aluminium frame\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e20.3 cm (8\") wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFully foldable design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePadded seat and back bar.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable handles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLocking hand brakes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRemovable under-seat carry bag.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOptional wire basket and removable food tray.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDark Navy finish.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12-month warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Premium_Rollator_Range_1.pdf?v=1756718429\" title=\"Goldfern Premium Rollator Range Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eGoldfern Premium Rollator Range Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Narrow Premium Rollator best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who need a seated four-wheel rollator but regularly move through tighter indoor spaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it compare with the X-FOLD Mini?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are compact. The X-FOLD Mini is lighter and slightly narrower overall, while the Narrow Premium uses a more conventional padded-seat Premium-rollator design.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow narrow is it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 55 cm overall.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the width between the arms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 38 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e127 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 34 × 30.5 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 51 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow high do the handles adjust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 80–89 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does it weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 8.7 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it fold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include a storage bag?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A removable under-seat nylon bag is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre other storage accessories available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. An optional wire basket and removable food tray are available.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20.3 cm (8\")\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e34 × 30.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e51 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth between arms\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e55 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e67 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNet weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8.7 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e127 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdjustable handle height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80–89 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848463947,"sku":"GF-NRWPREMWLKR","price":350.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/2f9d29a3-e674b4_075edd402f084b69bc3e90ed8659579b_mv2.jpg?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"electronic-blood-pressure-monitor","title":"Electronic Blood Pressure Monitor","description":"\u003ch2\u003eINSMART Electronic Blood Pressure Monitor\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eINSMART Electronic Blood Pressure Monitor\u003c\/strong\u003e is an automatic upper-arm monitor designed for convenient blood-pressure and pulse measurements at home. It uses one-touch operation, a large LCD display and memory for two users.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe device stores up to \u003cstrong\u003e99 readings for each of two users\u003c\/strong\u003e. It also includes a voice-broadcast function, colour backlight, an irregular-heartbeat indicator and a cuff designed for arm circumferences of approximately \u003cstrong\u003e22–32 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAutomatic \u003cstrong\u003eupper-arm blood-pressure monitor\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOne-touch operation\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLarge approximately \u003cstrong\u003e5 × 8 cm LCD display\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo-user memory\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStores up to \u003cstrong\u003e99 readings per user\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eVoice broadcast\u003c\/strong\u003e of measurement results.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree-colour display backlight\u003c\/strong\u003e for the device's visual reading classification.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIrregular-heartbeat indicator\u003c\/strong\u003e during measurement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUpper-arm cuff for approximately \u003cstrong\u003e22–32 cm arm circumference\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRechargeable digital design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact for home storage or travel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHome Monitoring, Not a Diagnosis\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA home blood-pressure monitor can help record measurements over time, but a single reading or device indicator does not diagnose a medical condition. Correct cuff size, positioning and measurement technique matter. Follow your healthcare professional's advice about how often to measure and what readings require follow-up.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGetting More Consistent Home Readings\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eElectronic Blood Pressure Monitor is most useful when readings are taken with a consistent technique and interpreted as part of a broader health picture. Read the supplied instructions before first use, keep the device clean and use it in the recommended position and environment. Recording results with the date, time and relevant symptoms can make them more useful when discussing health with a clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHome measurements can be affected by movement, recent activity, positioning and technique. Repeat unexpected readings as directed in the manual and seek clinical advice when results or symptoms cause concern. The device supports monitoring but should not delay urgent medical assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere is the cuff worn?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is an upper-arm monitor. The cuff is fitted around the upper arm according to the device instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat arm size does the cuff fit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe listed cuff range is approximately 22–32 cm arm circumference.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many people can store readings?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe monitor supports two user profiles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many readings can each user save?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to 99 readings can be stored for each user profile.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have voice output?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The monitor includes a voice-broadcast function for measurement results.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the three-colour backlight mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe backlight provides a visual classification generated by the device. It should be treated as a guide rather than a medical diagnosis.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it detect irregular heartbeats?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe monitor includes an irregular-heartbeat indicator that may appear during a measurement. An indicator is not a diagnosis; discuss repeated alerts or concerns with a healthcare professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow large is the display?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe listed LCD display size is approximately 5 × 8 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the monitor rechargeable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The current product is described as rechargeable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould I measure immediately after exercise, caffeine or smoking?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor consistent home readings, follow the measurement instructions supplied with the monitor and any advice from your healthcare professional. Resting quietly before measurement is commonly recommended.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy does cuff size matter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA cuff that does not fit the arm correctly can affect measurement quality. Confirm your arm circumference falls within the listed 22–32 cm range.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould I make medication changes based on a home reading?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Do not start, stop or change prescribed medication based only on a home measurement without advice from the healthcare professional managing your treatment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should I do if a reading or symptom concerns me?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow the care plan or advice given by your healthcare professional. Seek urgent medical help for severe or concerning symptoms regardless of what the monitor displays.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMeasurement location\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUpper arm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCuff range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 22–32 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUser profiles\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMemory\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e99 readings per user\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDisplay\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 5 × 8 cm LCD\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAudio\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eVoice broadcast\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAdditional indicators\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eThree-colour backlight; irregular-heartbeat indicator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRechargeable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848627787,"sku":"GM-BP-SL08-P01","price":75.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/852bbb04-e674b4_94c5788fc3d042fd8de52a09a6c3564f_mv2.jpg?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"non-contact-infrared-thermometer","title":"Non-Contact Infrared Thermometer","description":"\u003ch2\u003eNon-Contact Temperature Measurement from 3–5 cm\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern JXB-178 Non-Contact Infrared Thermometer\u003c\/strong\u003e provides contact-free temperature measurement for infants and adults. The thermometer is designed to take forehead measurements from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e3–5 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e away, helping reduce the need for direct skin contact between users.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThree modes allow measurement of \u003cstrong\u003eBody, Room and Surface\u003c\/strong\u003e temperatures. The unit stores up to \u003cstrong\u003e32 previous measurements\u003c\/strong\u003e, offers Celsius or Fahrenheit display and powers off automatically when not in use. Always follow the supplied operating instructions so the selected mode, measuring distance and ambient conditions are appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eUsing an Infrared Thermometer Consistently\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eInfrared thermometers are convenient, but technique matters. Use the correct mode, keep the measuring distance consistent and avoid taking a forehead reading immediately after the person has come in from a markedly hotter or colder environment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf a result seems unexpected, repeat the measurement according to the instructions. A temperature reading is one piece of information and should be considered alongside symptoms and appropriate health advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBody, Room and Surface Modes\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eBody mode\u003c\/strong\u003e is intended for forehead temperature measurement. \u003cstrong\u003eRoom\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003eSurface\u003c\/strong\u003e modes are provided for environmental or object temperatures and should not be confused with the body-temperature setting.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 32-reading memory can be useful for comparing recent measurements without writing each one down, while the °C\/°F option lets the display match the user's preferred unit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-contact infrared temperature measurement.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecommended measuring distance of approximately 3–5 cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBody, Room and Surface modes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMemory for up to 32 measurements.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCelsius and Fahrenheit display options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAutomatic power-off.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for forehead temperature measurement in infants and adults.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePowered by two AA batteries.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGetting More Consistent Home Readings\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eNon-Contact Infrared Thermometer is most useful when readings are taken with a consistent technique and interpreted as part of a broader health picture. Read the supplied instructions before first use, keep the device clean and use it in the recommended position and environment. Recording results with the date, time and relevant symptoms can make them more useful when discussing health with a clinician.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHome measurements can be affected by movement, recent activity, positioning and technique. Repeat unexpected readings as directed in the manual and seek clinical advice when results or symptoms cause concern. The device supports monitoring but should not delay urgent medical assessment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far from the forehead should the thermometer be held?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe JXB-452.1 cm (178\")structions specify a measuring distance of approximately 3–5 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat measurement modes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt provides Body, Room and Surface modes. Select the appropriate mode for what you are measuring.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many readings can it store?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe thermometer stores up to 32 previous measurements in memory.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it display Celsius and Fahrenheit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The unit supports both °C and °F display.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it need to touch the skin?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is designed for non-contact forehead measurement when used at the recommended distance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for infants and adults?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe JXB-452.1 cm (178\")structions describe forehead temperature measurement for infants and adults.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it measure room or surface temperature?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Room and Surface modes are provided in addition to Body mode.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat batteries does it use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe JXB-178 uses two AA batteries.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhy might two readings differ?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eInfrared readings can be affected by measuring distance, mode, forehead conditions and the surrounding environment. Use a consistent technique and repeat the reading if a result seems unusual.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould Body mode be used for objects or room temperature?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Use the dedicated Room or Surface mode for those measurements so the device interprets the infrared reading appropriately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it really provide 100,000 readings?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo verified current source was found for the previous 100,000-reading claim, so that claim has been removed from this listing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat should I do if the result seems unusual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRepeat the measurement using the correct mode, distance and operating instructions. Temperature readings should be considered alongside symptoms and appropriate health advice rather than used as a diagnosis by themselves.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Goldfern JXB-452.1 cm (178\")frared Thermometer available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This thermometer is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eJXB-178\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMeasurement method\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-contact infrared\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRecommended distance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3–5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBody, Room, Surface\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMemory\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 32 measurements\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDisplay units\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e°C \/ °F\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x AA batteries\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower saving\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAutomatic power-off\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848758859,"sku":"GM-GBMD-JXB-178","price":179.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/31c82166-e674b4_11477dcada9345208747a83c34dade75_mv2.jpg?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"byacre-travel-lock","title":"byACRE Travel Lock","description":"\u003ch2\u003ebyACRE Travel Lock\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ebyACRE Travel Lock\u003c\/strong\u003e is a small elastic replacement accessory that helps keep a folded rollator closed during transport and storage. It wraps around the folded frame to reduce the chance of the walker opening while it is being lifted, loaded or stored.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current byACRE elastic lock is compatible with the Carbon Ultralight, \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/byacre-carbon-overland-walker\"\u003eCarbon Overland\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/byacre-nordic-pioneer\"\u003eNordic Pioneer\u003c\/a\u003e rollators, making this spare useful if the original lock is lost or worn.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eElastic rollator lock\u003c\/strong\u003e keeps the folded frame closed.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightweight and flexible\u003c\/strong\u003e for easy fitting and removal.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUseful replacement or spare\u003c\/strong\u003e for travel and storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompatible with Carbon Ultralight, Carbon Overland and Nordic Pioneer rollators\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHelps keep the rollator compact\u003c\/strong\u003e while loading into a vehicle or storing it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Accessories-User-Manual_outlined-Rev-1.2.pdf?v=1756719135\" title=\"byACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ebyACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose a Spare byACRE Travel Lock?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Travel Lock is a simple part, but it makes a folded rollator easier to handle because the frame stays closed while being moved or stored. Keeping a spare on hand is useful if the original elastic lock is misplaced or eventually wears out.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMade for the Compatible byACRE Rollator\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ebyACRE Travel Lock is designed to add useful everyday function to a compatible byACRE rollator while retaining the clean, lightweight character of the frame. Confirm the rollator model and attachment points before ordering, then consider how the accessory will affect folding, carrying, transfers and access to the brakes or handles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFit and load the accessory according to its instructions, keeping carried items within the stated limits and evenly distributed. Check attachments before each outing. If the rollator is regularly lifted into a vehicle, practise removing or securing the accessory as part of the normal folding and transport routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the Travel Lock do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt wraps around the folded rollator to help keep the frame closed during transport or storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich rollators is it compatible with?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current elastic lock is compatible with the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/byacre-carbon-ultralight-walker\"\u003ebyACRE Carbon Ultralight\u003c\/a\u003e, Carbon Overland and Nordic Pioneer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it a security lock?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is an elastic folding retainer, not an anti-theft lock.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it use a key or combination?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a simple elastic strap and requires no key or combination.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhen should I use it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse it after folding the rollator when loading it into a vehicle, carrying it or storing it compactly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I walk with the Travel Lock fitted around the folded frame?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Remove the lock and fully unfold the rollator before walking with it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this useful as a replacement part?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It is suitable as a replacement or spare if the original elastic lock is lost or worn.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it permanently attach to the rollator?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is removed when the walker is unfolded for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it help when lifting the rollator into a car?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Keeping the folded frame closed can make the walker easier to handle while loading or unloading.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it change the folded dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It simply helps retain the rollator in its normal folded position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the rollator included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. This product is the Travel Lock accessory only.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs an accessory manual available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The byACRE accessories manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAccessory type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElastic folding lock \/ retainer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarbon Ultralight, Carbon Overland, Nordic Pioneer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePurpose\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eKeeps rollator folded during transport or storage\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOperation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElastic strap\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSecurity function\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot an anti-theft lock\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"byACRE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848955467,"sku":"BYACRE-TRVLLCK","price":6.5,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/af34d93a-e674b4_5bfc45db8eb5421da1f272a5218b90a8_mv2.webp?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"byacre-overland-cane-holder","title":"byACRE Overland Cane Holder","description":"\u003ch2\u003ebyACRE Overland Cane Holder\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ebyACRE Overland Cane Holder\u003c\/strong\u003e keeps a walking stick securely attached to the rollator while both hands remain available for the walker handles. The two-part design uses an upper clip and lower foot holder to keep the cane upright and close to the frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo top-clip sizes accommodate different cane diameters, while a drainage opening in the lower holder helps prevent water collecting after wet-weather use. MoveSmart carries left- and right-side variants so the holder can be fitted on the preferred side.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo-part cane support\u003c\/strong\u003e with upper clip and lower foot holder.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLeft- and right-side variants\u003c\/strong\u003e available.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo top-clip sizes\u003c\/strong\u003e for different cane diameters.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDrainage opening\u003c\/strong\u003e in the lower holder.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eKeeps the cane upright and close to the rollator\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTool-free everyday use\u003c\/strong\u003e once correctly fitted.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDesigned for compatible byACRE rollators\u003c\/strong\u003e, including the Carbon Overland.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Accessories-User-Manual_outlined-Rev-1.2.pdf?v=1756719135\" title=\"byACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ebyACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the byACRE Overland Cane Holder?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor users who alternate between a rollator and a walking stick, the holder keeps the cane available without requiring it to be carried by hand or placed loose in a bag. The upper and lower supports keep it positioned neatly alongside the rollator.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMade for the Compatible byACRE Rollator\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ebyACRE Overland Cane Holder is designed to add useful everyday function to a compatible byACRE rollator while retaining the clean, lightweight character of the frame. Confirm the rollator model and attachment points before ordering, then consider how the accessory will affect folding, carrying, transfers and access to the brakes or handles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFit and load the accessory according to its instructions, keeping carried items within the stated limits and evenly distributed. Check attachments before each outing. If the rollator is regularly lifted into a vehicle, practise removing or securing the accessory as part of the normal folding and transport routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the cane holder for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt allows a walking stick or cane to be carried securely on the rollator while walking.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it compatible with the Carbon Overland?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This MoveSmart listing is suitable for the byACRE Carbon Overland.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre left- and right-side versions available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. MoveSmart carries separate Left and Right variants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the cane stay in place?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe lower holder supports the cane tip while the upper clip secures the shaft.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it fit different cane diameters?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe holder includes two top-clip sizes to accommodate different cane shaft diameters.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the drainage hole for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt allows water to drain from the lower holder rather than collecting around the cane tip.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I remove the cane quickly?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cane can be released from the upper clip and lifted from the lower holder when needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the cane come with the holder?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. This product is the cane-holder accessory only.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it interfere with the rollator seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen correctly fitted according to the accessory instructions, it is designed to sit alongside the rollator without preventing normal use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I choose Left or Right?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSelect the side that is most convenient for reaching your cane and suits your normal walking setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in wet weather?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes for normal outdoor use. The drainage opening helps with moisture, but the accessory should still be cleaned and dried after wet conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs an accessory manual available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The byACRE accessories manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAccessory type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRollator cane holder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eVariants\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLeft, Right\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSupport system\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUpper clip and lower foot holder\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eClip options\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo sizes included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDrainage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLower-holder drainage opening\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarries a walking stick on the rollator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"byACRE","offers":[{"title":"Left","offer_id":41740490375243,"sku":"BYACRE-OLCNHLDR-1","price":95.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Right","offer_id":41740490408011,"sku":"BYACRE-OLCNHLDR-2","price":95.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/ad375a17-e674b4_14db67c502b344ce9fb2f482b624757c_mv2.webp?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"byacre-overland-back-rest","title":"byACRE Overland Padded Backrest","description":"\u003ch2\u003ebyACRE Overland Padded Backrest\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMake seated pauses on your Carbon Overland more comfortable with the \u003cstrong\u003ebyACRE Overland Padded Backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e. The padded support sits behind the lower back while you use the rollator's existing seat, adding a softer resting surface without replacing the walker or its seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDesigned for the moments between walking, it is a practical upgrade for anyone who regularly stops to rest during outings. The padding adds comfort and warmth, and redesigned attachment clips make it easier to fit or remove the accessory. Its dark grey finish complements the Overland, with a reflective heart on the rear for an additional visible detail in low light.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePadded lower-back support\u003c\/strong\u003e for more comfortable seated breaks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRedesigned attachment clips\u003c\/strong\u003e that fit onto the metal handlebar shafts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTool-free fitting and removal\u003c\/strong\u003e for everyday convenience.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable height\u003c\/strong\u003e to tailor the support position.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReflective heart detail\u003c\/strong\u003e on the rear.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStays fitted during normal folding\u003c\/strong\u003e of the rollator.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatibility and Fitting\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis backrest is designed for the \u003cstrong\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland\u003c\/strong\u003e. It also fits the \u003cstrong\u003eCarbon Ultralight Wide Track\u003c\/strong\u003e, although the colour differs from the Ultralight fittings. For an Ultralight Compact or Regular frame, choose the correct size of the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/byacre-ultralight-backrest\"\u003ebyACRE Ultralight Padded Backrest\u003c\/a\u003e instead. This is not a universal walker backrest.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eImportant:\u003c\/strong\u003e at least one adjustment hole must remain visible on the metal handlebar for the backrest to attach. Check with the handles set at your normal walking height before ordering. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/pages\/contact\"\u003eContact MoveSmart\u003c\/a\u003e when you need help confirming compatibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse the backrest for lower-back comfort only. It is not intended to carry full body weight, lift the rollator or assist a transfer. Engage the parking brakes before sitting and follow the instructions supplied with the walker and accessory. The rollator shown in product images is not included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Accessories-User-Manual_outlined-Rev-1.2.pdf?v=1756719135\" title=\"byACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\" rel=\"noopener\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ebyACRE Overland and Ultralight accessories manual\u003c\/a\u003e — general reference. For the padded version, follow the fitting instructions supplied with the accessory; the general guide may show the earlier attachment design.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube-nocookie.com\/embed\/H3zndeHzg4M?si=tQy5l110MBV1_pN-\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this the new padded Overland backrest?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. This listing is for the upgraded padded version with redesigned clips and a reflective heart on the rear.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhich walker is it designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is designed for the byACRE Carbon Overland rollator, subject to the visible handlebar-hole requirement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWill it fit a Carbon Ultralight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt fits the Wide Track Carbon Ultralight, not the Compact or Regular frame. Choose the Ultralight backrest in Regular\/Compact for those narrower models.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be fitted at every handle height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. At least one hole must remain visible on the metal handlebar. Check this at your usual handle setting before purchasing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes fitting require tools?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The redesigned clips allow tool-free attachment and removal. Use the supplied instructions and check both attachments before sitting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I adjust the support height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The backrest height is adjustable within the available fitting positions, helping you position the support behind the lower back.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the rollator still be folded?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The backrest can remain attached during normal folding. Avoid trapping or forcing it when storing the walker.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for leaning my full weight backwards?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a lower-back comfort accessory, not a full-body support. Keep the parking brakes engaged whenever you use the seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it as a handle to lift the walker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. Do not lift or carry the rollator by its backrest; follow the rollator's handling instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs a walker or replacement seat included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. This purchase is the padded backrest accessory only. It works with a compatible rollator's existing seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the reflective heart do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt adds a reflective detail at the rear. It is not a light and does not replace suitable visibility precautions after dark.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ebyACRE Overland Padded Backrest\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eAccessory type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePadded rollator backrest\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003ePrimary compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eAdditional compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarbon Ultralight Wide Track; colour differs from Ultralight fittings\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eColour\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDark grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eAttachment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRedesigned tool-free clips on metal handlebar shafts\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eFitting requirement\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAt least one handlebar adjustment hole must remain visible\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eAdjustment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeight adjustable within available fitting positions\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eFolding\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCan remain attached when the rollator is folded\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eReflective detail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHeart on the rear\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eIntended use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLower-back comfort during seated rests; not for full body weight or lifting\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eSupplier product code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20206N\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth scope=\"row\"\u003eSupplied\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePadded backrest accessory; rollator not included\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"byACRE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676848988235,"sku":"BYACRE-OLBCKRST","price":99.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/byacre-overland-padded-backrest-full-size.jpg?v=1789533232"},{"product_id":"byacre-carbon-overland-travel-bag","title":"byACRE Carbon Overland Travel Bag","description":"\u003ch2\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland Travel Bag\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/byacre-carbon-overland-walker\"\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland\u003c\/a\u003e Travel Bag\u003c\/strong\u003e is a padded transport bag designed to help protect the rollator from scratches and everyday handling marks while travelling. Its durable black exterior, soft padded lining and internal separator help keep the folded walker protected in transit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA carry handle and adjustable shoulder strap provide two carrying options, while the internal protection pad separates the wheels and front forks to reduce contact between components.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePadded travel protection\u003c\/strong\u003e for the Carbon Overland rollator.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDurable black exterior\u003c\/strong\u003e for repeated transport use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSoft padded lining\u003c\/strong\u003e helps protect the frame and components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eInternal protection pad\u003c\/strong\u003e separates wheels and front forks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCarry handle\u003c\/strong\u003e for short lifts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable shoulder strap\u003c\/strong\u003e for another carrying option.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDesigned for transporting the folded rollator\u003c\/strong\u003e in vehicles and general travel situations.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Accessories-User-Manual_outlined-Rev-1.2.pdf?v=1756719135\" title=\"byACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ebyACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the byACRE Carbon Overland Travel Bag?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Travel Bag gives Carbon Overland users a purpose-designed way to contain and protect the folded rollator during transport. Padding around the bag and an internal separator help reduce rubbing and scratches, while the two strap options make the packed walker easier to handle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMade for the Compatible byACRE Rollator\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland Travel Bag is designed to add useful everyday function to a compatible byACRE rollator while retaining the clean, lightweight character of the frame. Confirm the rollator model and attachment points before ordering, then consider how the accessory will affect folding, carrying, transfers and access to the brakes or handles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFit and load the accessory according to its instructions, keeping carried items within the stated limits and evenly distributed. Check attachments before each outing. If the rollator is regularly lifted into a vehicle, practise removing or securing the accessory as part of the normal folding and transport routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this travel bag suitable for the Carbon Overland?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This MoveSmart listing is intended for the byACRE Carbon Overland rollator.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the bag protect against?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe padded construction helps protect against everyday scratches, rubbing and light knocks during normal transport and handling.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the travel bag hard-shell luggage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a soft padded travel bag rather than a rigid hard case.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the internal protection pad for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt separates the wheels and front forks to help prevent components rubbing against one another while packed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the bag carried?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt has both a carry handle and an adjustable shoulder strap.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I fold the rollator before putting it in the bag?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Carbon Overland should be folded and packed according to the accessory instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the bag guarantee protection from airline damage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It adds padded protection but cannot guarantee against damage caused by rough baggage handling or crushing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I use it for storage at home?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It can also help keep the folded rollator contained and protected from incidental marks while stored.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the exterior waterproof?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bag is designed for travel protection, but it should not be treated as a waterproof case or left exposed to heavy rain.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the shoulder strap be adjusted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The shoulder strap is adjustable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs an accessories manual available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The byACRE accessories manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the rollator included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. This product is the travel bag accessory only.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAccessory type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePadded rollator travel bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eExterior\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDurable black material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLining\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft padded lining\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInternal protection\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSeparator pad for wheels and front forks\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCarry options\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarry handle and adjustable shoulder strap\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTransport and storage of folded rollator\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"byACRE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849053771,"sku":"BYACRE-OLTRVLBAG","price":235.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/ea3fdaec-e674b4_dfa74e915c594ea5a18ad6ab90ceb7e1_mv2.webp?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"byacre-pocket-bag","title":"byACRE Pocket Bag","description":"\u003ch2\u003ebyACRE Pocket Bag\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ebyACRE Pocket Bag\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact storage bag designed for the Carbon Overland rollator. It provides easy-access space for smaller everyday essentials such as a phone, wallet, keys and glasses without adding a bulky shopping bag to the walker.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe bag attaches to the rollator using side loops and an elastic strap, and it can be removed and carried separately using the adjustable shoulder strap. Weather-resistant outer materials and a water-repellent interior help protect contents during normal day-to-day use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCompact everyday storage\u003c\/strong\u003e for smaller personal items.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDesigned for the byACRE Carbon Overland\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSide loops and elastic strap\u003c\/strong\u003e secure the bag to the rollator.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable removable shoulder strap\u003c\/strong\u003e for standalone carrying.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeather-resistant exterior\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWater-repellent interior\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightweight and foldable\u003c\/strong\u003e for easy storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWipe-clean construction\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Accessories-User-Manual_outlined-Rev-1.2.pdf?v=1756719135\" title=\"byACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ebyACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the byACRE Pocket Bag?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Pocket Bag is useful when you only need to carry a few essentials and want them within easy reach. It stays attached neatly to the Carbon Overland while walking, then converts into a small shoulder bag when you leave the rollator behind.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMade for the Compatible byACRE Rollator\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ebyACRE Pocket Bag is designed to add useful everyday function to a compatible byACRE rollator while retaining the clean, lightweight character of the frame. Confirm the rollator model and attachment points before ordering, then consider how the accessory will affect folding, carrying, transfers and access to the brakes or handles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFit and load the accessory according to its instructions, keeping carried items within the stated limits and evenly distributed. Check attachments before each outing. If the rollator is regularly lifted into a vehicle, practise removing or securing the accessory as part of the normal folding and transport routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhich rollator is the Pocket Bag designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe byACRE Pocket Bag is designed for the Carbon Overland rollator.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat can I carry in it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is intended for small everyday essentials such as a phone, wallet, keys, glasses and similar lightweight items.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it attach to the walker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSide loops and a secure elastic strap hold it against the rollator frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I carry it without the rollator?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It has an adjustable, removable shoulder strap for standalone use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Pocket Bag waterproof?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt has a weather-resistant exterior and water-repellent interior, but it should not be treated as fully waterproof or submerged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be folded for storage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its lightweight construction allows it to fold down when not in use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I clean it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRoutine dirt can be wiped away with a damp cloth. Follow the accessory care instructions for more detailed cleaning guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it swing around while walking?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen correctly attached using both the loops and elastic strap, it is designed to remain close to the rollator frame during normal use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it interfere with the seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed as a rollator accessory and should be installed according to the supplied instructions so normal walker functions remain available.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the shoulder strap removable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The shoulder strap can be removed when the bag is being used solely on the rollator.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the rollator included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. This product is the Pocket Bag accessory only.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs an accessory manual available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The byACRE accessories manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAccessory type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompact rollator bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttachment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide loops and elastic strap\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCarry option\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable removable shoulder strap\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eExterior\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeather-resistant material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInterior\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater-repellent\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFoldable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCare\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWipe clean\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"byACRE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849086539,"sku":"BYACRE-PCKTBAG","price":69.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/b46e36f8-e674b4_51ca68c0488b452e993ca54f373ca2d5_mv2.webp?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"cruiser-vl2000-golf-cart","title":"Cruiser VL2000 Golf Cart","description":"\u003ch2\u003eCruiser VL2000 Stand-On Electric Golf Cart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eCruiser VL2000\u003c\/strong\u003e is a stand-on electric golf cart designed to move the golfer and their bag around the course together. Instead of walking behind a powered trolley or using a full-size seated golf cart, the player stands on a wide platform and rides directly between shots, keeping clubs, controls and course travel together in one compact vehicle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwin hub motors, electromagnetic braking, 25.4 cm (10\") all-terrain tyres and selectable \u003cstrong\u003e15 km\/h or 20 km\/h\u003c\/strong\u003e speed settings give the VL2000 enough performance for normal golf-course travel, while a secure rear bag platform keeps a compatible golf bag upright and accessible.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eA Different Way to Get Around the Course\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe VL2000 sits between a powered golf trolley and a conventional two-seat golf cart. It carries the golfer rather than making them walk behind their clubs, but its narrow stand-on format is much smaller and more individual than a full-size buggy.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat can appeal to golfers who still want an active, open-air round but would prefer to reduce the amount of walking between shots. It can also make moving from ball to ball quicker, particularly on longer courses where the distance covered over 18 holes adds up.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWide Standing Platform and Simple Controls\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe textured deck provides a broad standing area for the rider, with the steering controls positioned at the front. Two speed settings allow the cart to be limited to \u003cstrong\u003e15 km\/h\u003c\/strong\u003e or run up to \u003cstrong\u003e20 km\/h\u003c\/strong\u003e where course conditions and local rules allow.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe LED display keeps the main information visible while riding, including speed, distance and battery level. As with any powered vehicle, slower speeds are sensible around other golfers, tight paths, slopes and wet or uneven ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eTwin Hub Motors and Electromagnetic Braking\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwin hub motors drive the VL2000, providing smooth electric propulsion without a conventional petrol drivetrain. Electromagnetic braking helps slow and hold the cart without relying on a purely mechanical hand-brake system.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 25.4 cm (10\") all-terrain tyres are designed for typical course surfaces, but course conditions vary significantly. Wet grass, steep slopes and soft ground can affect traction, stability and range, so the cart should always be operated to suit the terrain.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCarry Your Golf Bag on the Cart\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA solid metal rear base supports the bottom of the golf bag, while an adjustable strap secures it higher up. This keeps the clubs behind the rider and allows quick access at each shot without needing a separate trolley.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe setup is intended for a compatible golf bag and sensible golf equipment rather than general heavy cargo. The load should be secured so it cannot move into the wheels or interfere with steering.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eRange for Multiple Rounds\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBattery range is approximately \u003cstrong\u003e45–60 km per charge\u003c\/strong\u003e, with charging taking around \u003cstrong\u003efour hours\u003c\/strong\u003e. That gives ample distance for normal golf-course use, although actual range changes with rider and bag weight, gradients, speed, surface conditions, temperature and battery condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs with any electric vehicle, it is better to finish a round with useful battery reserve than to plan around the maximum possible distance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eOptional Seat and Umbrella Accessory\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe standard VL2000 is a \u003cstrong\u003estand-on cart\u003c\/strong\u003e, but a compatible clip-on seat with storage is available separately for players who want the option to sit during parts of a round. An umbrella-pole attachment is also available as a separate accessory.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese accessories allow the cart to be tailored to the golfer without changing the core vehicle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwin hub motors\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e15 km\/h and 20 km\/h selectable speed settings\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eElectromagnetic braking\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLED display showing speed, distance and battery level.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApprox. 45–60 km battery range\u003c\/strong\u003e, depending on conditions.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApprox. 4-hour charging time\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e25.4 cm (10\") all-terrain tyres\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWide textured standing platform.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSecure adjustable golf-bag strap and solid metal bag base.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOptional clip-on seat with storage available separately.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOptional umbrella-pole attachment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMoveSmart variants in \u003cstrong\u003eWhite and Black\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube-nocookie.com\/embed\/ci9Wlm2CSbM?si=vedAEOfaO9xlUTDn\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube-nocookie.com\/embed\/hJslgFLSxF8?si=gSW2eWnR2retZ5NE\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWho Is the Cruiser VL2000 Best Suited To?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe VL2000 makes most sense for a golfer who wants to reduce course walking but does not necessarily want a conventional seated golf cart. It keeps the rider close to the game, is relatively compact on the course and carries the bag as part of the same vehicle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause it is a stand-on powered vehicle, balance, confidence and the ability to step on and off the platform safely are important. If standing while riding is not suitable, a conventional seated golf cart may be a better choice even though an optional VL2000 seat exists.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Cruiser VL2000 a seated golf cart?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe standard VL2000 is a stand-on electric golf cart. An optional clip-on seat is available separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat speed settings are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cart provides selectable 15 km\/h and 20 km\/h settings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far can it travel on a charge?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRange is approximately 45–60 km per charge. Real-world distance varies with rider and bag weight, terrain, gradients, speed, temperature and battery condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow long does charging take?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCharging takes approximately four hours.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat braking system is used?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe VL2000 uses electromagnetic braking.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the LED display show?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSpeed, distance and battery-level information.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size are the tyres?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt uses 25.4 cm (10\") all-terrain tyres.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the golf bag carried?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA solid rear bag base and adjustable retaining strap secure a compatible golf bag.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat colours does MoveSmart currently offer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhite and Black.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan a seat be added?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A compatible clip-on seat with storage is available as an optional accessory.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs an umbrella attachment available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. An umbrella-pole attachment is available separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on public roads?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eDo not assume road legality. The VL2000 is primarily intended for suitable private and golf-course use; check local requirements before any other use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered NZ-wide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. MoveSmart can arrange delivery across New Zealand. Because this is a larger powered product, contact us if you would like to discuss delivery, setup or whether the VL2000 is the right golf-cart style for you.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMotor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwin hub motors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpeed settings\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15 km\/h and 20 km\/h\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRange\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 45–60 km\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCharge time\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 4 hours\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBrakes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eElectromagnetic\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTyres\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e25.4 cm (10\") all-terrain\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDisplay\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSpeed, distance and battery level\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrent colours\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite; Black\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Golf Distributors","offers":[{"title":"White","offer_id":41717253865547,"sku":"GF-VL2000-W","price":4899.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Black","offer_id":41717253898315,"sku":"GF-VL2001-B","price":4899.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/4602de3f-e674b4_c16aad367cec4f88aeea490399738452_mv2.png?v=1788565786"},{"product_id":"over-wheelchair-table","title":"Over Wheelchair Table","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Over Wheelchair Table\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Over Wheelchair Table\u003c\/strong\u003e provides a convenient surface for meals, reading, writing and everyday activities while seated in a wheelchair. Its robust \u003cstrong\u003eanodised aluminium frame\u003c\/strong\u003e and wheelchair-friendly base are designed to allow close access without unnecessary obstruction around the chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe table is \u003cstrong\u003eheight adjustable\u003c\/strong\u003e and rolls on \u003cstrong\u003efour smooth-running castors\u003c\/strong\u003e for easy repositioning. The Goldfern instructions specify a \u003cstrong\u003e10 kg safe working load\u003c\/strong\u003e; the table should not be sat on or used as a support when standing or sitting down.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAnodised aluminium frame\u003c\/strong\u003e for a robust, practical construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWheelchair-compatible base\u003c\/strong\u003e designed to allow close positioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable tabletop\u003c\/strong\u003e for different users and chair setups.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFour smooth-running castors\u003c\/strong\u003e for manoeuvrability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 kg safe working load\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful for meals, reading, writing and compatible personal devices.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Over Wheelchair Table?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe table is purpose-designed around wheelchair access rather than being a general household table placed in front of a chair. Its open base, adjustable height and castors make it easier to position a useful work or meal surface close to the user while keeping the setup straightforward for everyday home or care use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePlanning the Table Position\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Over Wheelchair Table is easier to use when the base, column and tabletop can reach the required position without interfering with the wheelchair frame, footrests or wheels. Check the usable height range, base clearance and the direction from which the table will approach. The user should be able to sit comfortably without leaning, twisting or trapping their legs beneath the top.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAllow room for the chair and table to move independently, and apply any provided brakes before placing drinks or equipment on the surface. Keep loads within the published limit and distribute them evenly. Height or angle adjustments should be made carefully so loose objects cannot slide from the tabletop.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the Over Wheelchair Table designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt provides an accessible surface for everyday activities such as meals, reading, writing and using suitable personal devices while seated in a wheelchair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the frame aluminium?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Goldfern specifies a robust anodised aluminium frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the table height adjustable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The tabletop height can be raised or lowered to suit the user and wheelchair setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the height adjusted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Goldfern instructions use a hand nut and ratchet lever. The hand nut should be loosened before adjusting the tabletop, then tightened again once the preferred height is set.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the safe working load?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published safe working load is 10 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I lean on the table when standing up?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Goldfern specifically advises not to lean on the table for support when sitting down or standing up.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the table be used as a seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a tabletop and must not be sat on.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many castors does it have?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe table has four smooth-running castor wheels for repositioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill the base accommodate a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe base is specifically designed to accommodate wheelchairs and allow close access. Wheelchair dimensions and individual setup should still be checked for fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for home and care environments?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Its accessible design makes it suitable for everyday use in homes and care settings where an over-wheelchair surface is useful.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Over Wheelchair Table available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Over Wheelchair Table is available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAnodised aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAdjustable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDesigned to accommodate wheelchairs\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCastors\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e4 smooth-running castors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSafe working load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849119307,"sku":"GF-OVRCHRTBL","price":339.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/a860e8f2-e674b4_a1e9265c1817497a882cd63764dd4e3a_mv2.jpg?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"byacre-carbon-overland-daypack","title":"byACRE Carbon Overland Day-pack","description":"\u003ch2\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland Day-pack\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/byacre-carbon-overland-walker\"\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland\u003c\/a\u003e Day-pack\u003c\/strong\u003e is a practical rollator bag for carrying everyday essentials, shopping items and gear on longer outings. It attaches securely to the walker using side hooks and elastic straps, with a firm base that helps the bag stay upright when set down.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWeather-resistant, water-repellent materials help protect the contents during everyday outdoor use, while external stash pockets, daisy-chain attachment points and soft carry handles make the Day-pack useful both on and off the rollator.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSecure rollator attachment\u003c\/strong\u003e using side hooks and elastic straps.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFirm base\u003c\/strong\u003e helps the bag stand upright.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWeather-resistant, water-repellent construction\u003c\/strong\u003e for everyday outdoor use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExternal stash pockets\u003c\/strong\u003e for quick-access items.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDaisy-chain and tie-out points\u003c\/strong\u003e for additional attachment options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSoft carry handles\u003c\/strong\u003e for standalone use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWipe-clean surface\u003c\/strong\u003e for straightforward care.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSuitable for everyday errands, day trips and outdoor outings\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Accessories-User-Manual_outlined-Rev-1.2.pdf?v=1756719135\" title=\"byACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ebyACRE Overland and Ultralight Accessories Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the byACRE Carbon Overland Day-pack?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Day-pack adds useful carrying space without requiring the user to carry a separate backpack while walking. Its secure attachment, firm base and carry handles make it easy to move between rollator use and everyday carrying.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMade for the Compatible byACRE Rollator\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland Day-pack is designed to add useful everyday function to a compatible byACRE rollator while retaining the clean, lightweight character of the frame. Confirm the rollator model and attachment points before ordering, then consider how the accessory will affect folding, carrying, transfers and access to the brakes or handles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFit and load the accessory according to its instructions, keeping carried items within the stated limits and evenly distributed. Check attachments before each outing. If the rollator is regularly lifted into a vehicle, practise removing or securing the accessory as part of the normal folding and transport routine.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Day-pack compatible with the Carbon Overland?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This MoveSmart product is suitable for the byACRE Carbon Overland rollator.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the Day-pack attach?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt uses small side hooks and elastic rear straps to secure the bag to the rollator.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill the bag stay stable while walking?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe attachment points are designed to hold the bag securely during normal rollator use. Always make sure the hooks and straps are correctly fitted before moving.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I carry the bag separately?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Soft carry handles allow it to be removed from the rollator and carried as a standalone bag.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Day-pack waterproof?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe materials are water-repellent and weather-resistant for everyday use, but the bag should not be treated as fully waterproof or submerged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have outside pockets?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. External stash pockets provide quick access to smaller items.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the daisy-chain loops for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey provide extra attachment points for suitable lightweight items or accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the bag stand upright when removed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe firm base helps it remain upright on a suitable flat surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should I clean it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRoutine dirt can be wiped away with a damp cloth. Follow the accessory care instructions for more detailed cleaning guidance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I overload the bag?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Keep the load sensible and balanced so it does not affect rollator handling or stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it replace the rollator seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Day-pack is a storage accessory and should be positioned only as directed so the walker can still be used safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs an accessory manual available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The byACRE accessories manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAccessory type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRollator day bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eAttachment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSide hooks and elastic straps\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFirm base\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eExterior\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWeather-resistant, water-repellent material\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStorage features\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eExternal stash pockets, tie-out loops and daisy chains\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCarry option\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft carry handles\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCare\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWipe clean\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"byACRE","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849152075,"sku":"BYACRE-OLDAYPACK","price":135.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/373684c4-e674b4_44404c522a9b4f90bf2795bc3204676b_mv2.jpg?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"merits-yoga-portable-travel-scooter","title":"Merits Yoga Folding Travel Mobility Scooter","description":"\u003ch2\u003eMerits Yoga Folding Travel Mobility Scooter\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMerits Yoga Folding Travel Mobility Scooter\u003c\/strong\u003e is a compact folding scooter designed for travel, vehicle transport and everyday use where storage space matters. Its lightweight alloy frame, folding seat and adjustable steering column collapse into a compact unit that can be stored upright or placed in the included travel carry case.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Yoga supports users up to \u003cstrong\u003e114 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, reaches up to \u003cstrong\u003e6.4 km\/h\u003c\/strong\u003e, and has a stated maximum range of up to \u003cstrong\u003e18 km\u003c\/strong\u003e. A 24V 11.5Ah lithium-ion battery, electromagnetic braking and corner-speed reduction support controlled everyday driving.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFoldable travel design\u003c\/strong\u003e for compact storage and transport.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e26 kg net scooter weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e114 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e24V 11.5Ah lithium-ion battery\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to 18 km stated range\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaximum speed up to 6.4 km\/h\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCorner-speed reduction\u003c\/strong\u003e for added control while turning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eElectromagnetic braking\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable seat and steering column\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e15.2 cm (6\") front and 17.8 cm (7\") rear foam-filled tyres\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIncluded travel carry case\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRed finish\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca title=\"Merits S542 Yoga Portable Scooter Owners Manual\" href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Merits_Yoga_Owners_Manual.pdf?v=1756339550\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eMerits S542 Yoga Portable Scooter Owners Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Merits Yoga?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Yoga suits users who prioritise portability over the size and range of a full-size scooter. It folds into a compact package, uses a removable lithium-ion battery and remains light enough for travel situations where a conventional mobility scooter would be difficult to transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe title=\"YouTube video player\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube-nocookie.com\/embed\/B0cs5WhRKB0?si=9i-fT-azXNeHAzhh\" height=\"315\" width=\"560\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing a Scooter for Real-World Journeys\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMerits Yoga Portable Travel Scooter should be considered in the context of the trips it will make most often. Think about typical distance, gradients, footpaths, kerbs, storage and access at home, as well as whether the scooter will need to be loaded into a vehicle. Published range figures are useful for comparison, but actual distance varies with user weight, terrain, temperature, tyre condition and battery condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eSeat position and control reach should allow a relaxed, secure driving posture with clear forward visibility. Before committing to a scooter, check the overall dimensions against gates, ramps and storage areas and arrange a trial where possible. A regular charging routine, tyre checks and scheduled servicing help keep the scooter dependable for day-to-day travel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Yoga supports users up to 114 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the scooter weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe net scooter weight is approximately 26 kg. The current NZ specification lists approximately 31 kg when packed in the travel case.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum speed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe maximum speed is up to 6.4 km\/h.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the stated range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe stated maximum range is up to 18 km per charge. Actual range varies with user weight, terrain, gradients, battery condition, temperature and driving style.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat battery does it use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt uses a rechargeable 24V 11.5Ah lithium-ion battery.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it fold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The frame, steering column and seat fold into a compact unit for storage and transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs a travel case included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The current NZ distributor specification includes a travel carry case.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size are the wheels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe front wheels are 15.2 cm (6\") foam-filled tyres and the rear wheels are 17.8 cm (7\") foam-filled tyres.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the ground clearance?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eGround clearance is approximately 10 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the turning radius?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe turning radius is approximately 96 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it slow automatically in corners?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A corner-speed reduction system helps control speed while turning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have electromagnetic brakes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Yoga uses electromagnetic braking.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan a mobility scooter battery be taken on an aircraft?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAirline requirements vary. Always confirm acceptance, battery documentation and packing requirements directly with the airline before travel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs a user manual available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Yoga owner’s manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered throughout New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe can and do deliver to customers across New Zealand — however, mobility scooters and power chairs are more complex products and can be sizeable, so we generally recommend finding a local retailer who can provide hands-on service and ongoing support. It is also a good idea to test-drive or trial a mobility scooter before committing to a purchase. MoveSmart focuses its sales and servicing within the Central Plateau region, but we are always happy to chat. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/pages\/contact\"\u003eGet in touch\u003c\/a\u003e and we can offer advice, suggest a trusted dealer closer to you, or work with you to tailor a solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMMS-S542-WR\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e114 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum speed\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.4 km\/h\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStated maximum range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to 18 km\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTurning radius\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e96 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGround clearance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMotor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC 24V, 80W rated \/ 250W max\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBattery\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e24V 11.5Ah lithium-ion\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e43 cm wide × 99 cm long × 104 cm high\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFront wheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15.2 cm (6\") foam-filled tyres\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRear wheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e17.8 cm (7\") foam-filled tyres\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNet weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e26 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWeight in travel case\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 31 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColour\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Merits","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849283147,"sku":"GF-MERITSYOGA","price":4899.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/3755eee6-e674b4_60eeddd93ec642879258ddb813306d93_mv2.png?v=1754901807"},{"product_id":"transfer-disc-rolko-easy-transfer","title":"Transfer Disc Rolko Easy TRANSFER","description":"\u003ch2\u003eStanding Pivot Transfer Disc for Assisted Transfers\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Disc\u003c\/strong\u003e is a floor-based turning aid designed to support \u003cstrong\u003econtrolled standing pivot transfers with the assistance of a helper\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is intended for people who can stand and bear most of their own weight through their legs but may have difficulty turning safely between nearby surfaces such as a bed, wheelchair, chair or toilet.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe user places both feet centrally on the grey non-slip surface. During the transfer, the helper steadies and controls the disc with one foot while assisting the user from sitting to standing, rotating them into position, and lowering them onto the destination surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eHow the EasyTRANSFER Disc Is Intended to Be Used\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis is a \u003cstrong\u003estanding pivot disc for the feet\u003c\/strong\u003e. It is not primarily a seated transfer disc.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eFor a typical bed-to-wheelchair transfer, the wheelchair is positioned as close as practical to the bed and secured against rolling. The transfer disc is placed flat on the floor between the two surfaces with the grey slip-resistant side facing upwards.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe helper places the heel on the floor and the ball of one foot on the disc to prevent uncontrolled rotation. The user’s feet are positioned centrally on the disc. The user is then assisted into standing, rotates while standing on the disc, and is slowly lowered onto the wheelchair once the correct position is reached.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eWho Is It Suitable For?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe EasyTRANSFER is intended for a person who can \u003cstrong\u003ecarry their own weight through their legs to a substantial degree\u003c\/strong\u003e and can stand in balance, either independently or with appropriate support. It should always be used with a helper.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is not suitable where the user cannot bear their own weight, cannot stand securely enough for the transfer, or where a helper is not available. In those situations, a different transfer method such as a hoist may be more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eSeated Transfer Use with a Transfer Board\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe disc can also be used as part of a \u003cstrong\u003eseated transfer system when combined with the Rolko EasyTRANSFER transfer board\u003c\/strong\u003e. That is an additional use rather than the primary function of the disc on its own.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStanding pivot transfer aid\u003c\/strong\u003e for assisted transfers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e130 kg maximum load\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e41.3 cm disc diameter\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3.7 cm overall height\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e46 cm overall width including handles\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e1.8 kg product weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eGrey \u003cstrong\u003eslip-resistant upper surface\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated handles for lifting and positioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for \u003cstrong\u003eindoor use on flat, dry floors\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be used with the Rolko EasyTRANSFER transfer board for selected seated transfers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMedical-device accessory with CE marking under EU MDR.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMeets the applicable sections of \u003cstrong\u003eDIN EN ISO 21856\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eImportant Safety Information\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe user must not use the disc alone; a helper is required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe user must be able to bear their own weight through their legs to a substantial degree.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUse only on a flat, dry floor with adequate slip resistance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eThe helper should stabilise and control the disc during the transfer.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDo not use a damaged or defective disc.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCheck the disc before each use and make sure it rotates freely and remains stable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDo not leave it lying on the floor when not in use because it can create a trip hazard.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eCleaning and Maintenance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWipe with a damp cloth and, if needed, a mild non-abrasive pH-neutral household cleaner using lukewarm water. Household disinfectants can also be used by spray or wipe application. Cleaning or disinfecting agents containing chlorine or active chlorine should not be used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBefore each use, check that the disc is undamaged and working correctly. Monthly checks should include visual condition, ease of rotation, the screw connection between the upper and lower sections, and overall stability and slip resistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs this a standing pivot disc for the feet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eYes.\u003c\/strong\u003e That is its primary intended use. The user stands with both feet centred on the disc while a helper assists and controls the turning movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for a bed-to-wheelchair transfer?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The instruction manual specifically demonstrates a bed-to-wheelchair standing pivot transfer using the disc.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for transfers to and from a toilet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. It can be used for other nearby position changes, including transfers involving a toilet, provided the user and helper can complete the standing transfer safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the user need to be able to stand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The user must be able to bear most of their own weight through their legs and stand securely enough to complete the pivot transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used without a helper?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The disc is intended to be used with assistance from a helper.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow does the helper control the disc?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe helper places the heel on the floor and the ball of one foot on the transfer disc to stabilise and regulate the turning movement during the pivot.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used for seated transfers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, but only as an additional application when used together with a suitable Rolko EasyTRANSFER transfer board. The disc on its own is primarily a standing pivot aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum load?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe maximum load is 130 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the disc diameter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe turning surface is approximately 41.3 cm in diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow high is the disc?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe height is approximately 3.7 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow wide is it including the handles?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe total width including the handles is approximately 46 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much does it weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe product weighs approximately 1.8 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat type of floor should it be used on?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse it indoors on a flat, dry floor that allows stable, slip-resistant positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used outdoors?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The instructions specify indoor use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat should be checked before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck for damage, make sure the disc rotates smoothly, confirm there is no unwanted play between the upper and lower sections, and make sure the disc is stable and slip-resistant.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eUse a damp cloth with lukewarm water and, if necessary, a mild non-abrasive pH-neutral household cleaner. Chlorine-based cleaners should not be used.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it a medical device?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is supplied as an accessory for Class I medical devices, carries CE marking under EU MDR 2017\/745 and meets the applicable sections of DIN EN ISO 21856.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\n\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Disc \/ Turning Table\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eItem number\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDRT-400\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePrimary use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAssisted standing pivot transfer\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDisc diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e41.3 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3.7 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal width including handles\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e46 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.8 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUpper surface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eGrey, slip-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeet\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLight grey\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterials\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePS, TPE, PP, PA and galvanised steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOperating temperature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e+10 to +40°C\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse environment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIndoor use on flat, dry floors\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHelper required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eYes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeated-transfer compatibility\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCan be combined with Rolko EasyTRANSFER transfer board RBK-700-01\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApplicable sections of DIN EN ISO 21856\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRegulatory status\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCE marked under EU MDR 2017\/745 as an accessory for Class I medical devices\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBasic UDI-DI\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e426067605DTEASYTRANSFERWA\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Rolko","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849184843,"sku":"TW-TRNSFRDISC","price":199.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/959ce177-e674b4_be9e44cd8012440bb198dfbd81ce51e7_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"transfer-board-rolko-easy-transfer","title":"Transfer Board Rolko Easy TRANSFER","description":"\u003ch2\u003eRolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Board – 70 cm\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eRolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Board\u003c\/strong\u003e is a 70 cm sliding board designed to bridge short gaps during seated transfers, such as between a wheelchair and bed, chair or compatible vehicle seat. It includes integrated handholds plus recesses shaped to provide clearance around wheelchair tyres and push rims.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e70 cm long x 23 cm wide x 1.2 cm high\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e130 kg carrying capacity\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e1.65 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e product weight.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIntegrated handles for positioning and carrying.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRecesses for wheelchair tyres and push rims.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for assisted or appropriate independent seated transfers.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be combined with the Rolko EasyTRANSFER transfer disc.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMDR-compliant medical device.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSafe Transfer Setup\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA transfer board should bridge two stable surfaces with enough overlap at each end to remain secure. The user's transfer ability, upper-body control and need for assistance should be assessed before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePlanning a Controlled Transfer\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eTransfer Board Rolko Easy TRANSFER is intended to support a specific part of a transfer rather than replace good positioning and an appropriate transfer technique. The starting and destination surfaces should be stable, close enough for the planned movement and arranged so the user and caregiver can work without twisting or reaching unexpectedly.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eBefore regular use, confirm that the product’s dimensions and stated load rating suit the user and environment. Clothing, footwear, floor condition and the height difference between surfaces can all affect how smoothly a transfer works. A physiotherapist or occupational therapist can help determine suitability and teach a technique matched to the person’s strength, balance and ability to follow instructions.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube-nocookie.com\/embed\/qfYfmbjuhEA?si=74mTVS8qkozAMjoS\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the board used for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt helps bridge a short gap so a seated user can move across between suitable surfaces without needing a full standing transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long is the board?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e70 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow wide and thick is it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproximately 23 cm wide and 1.2 cm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the carrying capacity?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe carrying capacity is 130 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much does it weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproximately 1.65 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhy does the board have recesses?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe shaped recesses provide clearance around wheelchair tyres and push rims when the board is positioned beside a wheelchair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used independently?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSome users with appropriate strength, balance and transfer technique may use it independently. Others will require assistance.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be combined with the Rolko transfer disc?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Rolko lists the EasyTRANSFER disc as a compatible accessory.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan the board be used for standing transfers?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a seated sliding-transfer board and should not be stood on.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWill it work between any two surfaces?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The surfaces must be stable, close enough together and at suitable heights for the board and user's transfer technique.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it remove the need for transfer training?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. A suitable transfer technique is important. Seek occupational-therapy or physiotherapy guidance if transfer safety is uncertain.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShould the board be checked before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Do not use it if cracked, damaged, excessively worn or unable to sit securely between the transfer surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Rolko EasyTRANSFER Transfer Board available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. This transfer board is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e23 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.2 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCarrying capacity\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e1.65 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColour\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWhite\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Rolko","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849250379,"sku":"TW-TRNSFRBRD","price":119.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/b94b590c-e674b4_d3c956b4f23e4c4a8f592148b47fe3f7_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"medi-soft-firm-ring-cushion","title":"Medi-Soft Firm Ring Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003eMedi-Soft Firm Ring Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMedi-Soft Firm Ring Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e is a moulded firm ring cushion with a central opening, supplied with a removable cotton cover and carry bag. Its 44 cm outside diameter provides a broad seated support surface, while the 12 cm centre opening reduces direct contact beneath the central area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFirm or Soft Ring Cushion?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose this \u003cstrong\u003eFirm Ring Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e when a more supportive, structured feel is preferred. The \u003cstrong\u003eMedi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e uses softer eggshell-style foam and sits slightly higher at approximately 8 cm. Both have a 44 cm outside diameter and 12 cm central opening, so the main choice is the feel and support level rather than overall footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFirm moulded ring cushion.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e44 cm outside diameter\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12 cm inside opening\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e7 cm high\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eRemovable cotton cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCover is machine washable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCarry bag included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePortable for home, office or travel use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePressure-Care Note\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRing cushions can change where pressure is concentrated while sitting. For users with an existing pressure injury, fragile skin or high pressure-injury risk, cushion choice should be guided by an appropriate healthcare professional rather than relying on shape alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMedi-Soft Firm Ring Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the outside diameter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 44 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow large is the centre opening?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 12 cm in diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow high is the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 7 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this the firmer Medi-Soft ring cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This model is the moulded firm ring cushion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference from the Medi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis version has a firmer moulded feel and is approximately 7 cm high. The Foam Ring Cushion is softer and approximately 8 cm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a removable cover?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A removable cotton cover is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the cover be machine washed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The current product information specifies a machine-washable cover.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include a carry bag?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A carry bag is supplied.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnly where the cushion is stable, fits the seat and does not interfere with posture or wheelchair dimensions. A purpose-designed wheelchair cushion may be more appropriate for ongoing pressure care.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it prevent pressure injuries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo cushion can guarantee prevention. Users at pressure-injury risk should have their seating needs assessed appropriately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used after surgery?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may be considered when a clinician recommends this style of support, but suitability depends on the procedure and individual.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the cushion be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow the supplied care instructions and avoid methods that could damage the moulded cushion. The removable cotton cover can be cleaned separately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOutside diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInside diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRemovable cotton, machine washable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eIncluded\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarry bag\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Medi-Soft","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849315915,"sku":"CUB-MEDIRINGFIRM","price":95.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/49bf941c-e674b4_e66737f95b5f44c48f6bd8a7f824a0a6_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"medi-soft-foam-ring-cushion","title":"Medi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003eMedi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMedi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e is a soft oval ring cushion made from moulded eggshell-style foam and supplied with a cotton cover. Its central opening reduces direct contact beneath the middle of the seated area, while the soft foam provides a more forgiving feel than the firm Medi-Soft ring cushion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSoft or Firm Ring Cushion?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eFoam Ring Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e when a softer, more forgiving feel is preferred. The \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/medi-soft-firm-ring-cushion\"\u003eMedi-Soft Firm Ring Cushion\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e has a more structured moulded feel and sits slightly lower at approximately 7 cm. Both have a 44 cm outside diameter and 12 cm central opening, so the main difference is firmness and feel rather than overall footprint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft moulded eggshell-style foam.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOval ring design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e44 cm outside diameter\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12 cm inside opening\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e8 cm high\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCotton cover included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight and portable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePressure-Care Note\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRing-shaped cushions alter the distribution of sitting pressure. They are not automatically suitable for every pressure-care need. Users with fragile skin, an existing wound or significant pressure-injury risk should seek professional seating advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMedi-Soft Foam Ring Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the outside diameter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 44 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow large is the central opening?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 12 cm in diameter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow high is the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 8 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the cushion made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA soft moulded eggshell-style foam.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does it differ from the Firm Ring Cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis version is softer and approximately 8 cm high. The Firm Ring Cushion has a more structured moulded feel and is approximately 7 cm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs a cover included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A cotton cover is supplied.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for smaller users?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCubro describes this softer model as particularly suited to smaller people, although fit still depends on the chair and individual.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on a dining or office chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, if the chair seat is broad, flat and stable enough to support the cushion without overhang or movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnly if it fits securely and is appropriate for the user's posture and pressure-care needs. A dedicated wheelchair cushion may be preferable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it prevent pressure injuries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo specific outcome is guaranteed. Cushion suitability should be assessed for users at pressure-injury risk.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used following surgery?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnly if this style of support is appropriate for the procedure and the user's clinical advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRemove the cover for cleaning and follow the product care instructions so the foam is not damaged or saturated.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOutside diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInside diameter\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e8 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft moulded eggshell-style foam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCotton\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Medi-Soft","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849348683,"sku":"CUB-MEDIRINGSOFT","price":59.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/22df4fbd-e674b4_9c6fa694f46f4e878bf4b0595ee4a4a5_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"medi-soft-chair-cushion","title":"Medi-Soft Chair Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003eMedi-Soft Chair Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMedi-Soft Chair Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e uses temperature-sensitive Posture-Temp visco-memory foam to provide a soft, conforming seated surface. The foam warms and gradually moulds to the user's shape, increasing contact area for medium pressure redistribution.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePosture-Temp open-cell visco-memory foam.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e40 cm wide x 45 cm deep x 7.5 cm high\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft temperature-responsive feel.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMedium pressure redistribution.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo-way stretch breathable cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWater-resistant\/waterproof care-cover construction as specified for the current product family.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStain-resistant and fire-resistant cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAnti-allergenic and antimicrobial properties.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for compatible chairs with enough seat area.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhen to Choose the Medi-Soft Chair Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis is the straightforward single-size option in the range. It suits users who want a soft, temperature-responsive memory-foam cushion in a common 40 × 45 cm footprint. If you need a larger 45 × 51 cm option, or want to choose between two seat sizes, the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/posture-temp-pressure-relieving-cushion\"\u003ePosture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e offers both 40 × 45 cm and 45 × 51 cm versions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePressure-Care Note\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis cushion can support pressure redistribution but is not a substitute for individual assessment where a person has a pressure injury, fragile skin or higher pressure-care risk.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMedi-Soft Chair Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the cushion dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 40 cm wide x 45 cm deep x 7.5 cm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat type of foam is used?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eTemperature-sensitive Posture-Temp open-cell visco-memory foam.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the foam feel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt starts supportive and gradually softens with body warmth, conforming more closely to the user's shape.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat level of pressure support does it provide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current product information describes medium pressure reduction\/redistribution.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is this different from the Posture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Medi-Soft Chair Cushion is the simpler single-size 40 × 45 × 7.5 cm option. The Posture-Temp cushion is available in two sizes, including a larger 45 × 51 cm version.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the cover breathable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cover is designed to be breathable while providing a care-friendly protective surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the cover stretch?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The two-way stretch construction helps the cover move with the cushion and reduce surface friction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for allergy-sensitive users?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushion and cover are described as hypo-allergenic\/dust-mite resistant and antimicrobial, though individual sensitivities vary.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on an office chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, if the chair provides a stable base large enough for the 40 × 45 cm cushion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may fit some wheelchairs, but wheelchair seating requires correct dimensions and posture support. Confirm suitability where ongoing wheelchair use is intended.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it prevent pressure injuries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo cushion can guarantee prevention. Users at elevated risk should have their seating and repositioning needs assessed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the cover be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow the current care instructions for the cover material and avoid cleaning methods that could damage the foam or protective coating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow thick is the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 7.5 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 × 45 × 7.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFoam\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTemperature-sensitive visco-memory foam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePressure support\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMedium pressure redistribution\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo-way stretch, breathable protective cover\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Medi-Soft","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849381451,"sku":"CUB-MEDISFTPRESCUSH","price":99.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/2c50b59c-e674b4_c193a05177cf46eca7cd6eb34bd71a99_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"posture-temp-pressure-relieving-cushion","title":"Posture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003ePosture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ePosture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e uses temperature-sensitive, open-cell visco-memory foam that gradually conforms to the user while seated. This increases the contact area between the body and cushion to support medium-level pressure redistribution and everyday seated comfort.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the Right Size\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart offers two versions: \u003cstrong\u003e40 × 45 × 7.5 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e45 × 51 × 7.5 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Choose the size that sits fully and securely on the chair base without overhang, while matching the user's seating width and depth. The larger version is useful where a broader or deeper seat surface is required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePosture-Temp or Medi-Soft?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth use temperature-responsive visco-memory foam for medium pressure redistribution. The \u003cstrong\u003ePosture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e is the more size-flexible option, with two available footprints and a bi-elastic protective cover. The \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/medi-soft-chair-cushion\"\u003eMedi-Soft Chair Cushion\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is the simpler single-size 40 × 45 × 7.5 cm option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTemperature-sensitive visco-memory foam.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eOpen-cell foam construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMedium pressure redistribution.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTwo current sizes: \u003cstrong\u003e40 × 45 × 7.5 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e45 × 51 × 7.5 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBi-elastic, two-way stretch cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBreathable and waterproof cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStain-resistant and fire-resistant cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAnti-allergenic and antimicrobial properties.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for compatible chairs with a stable, adequately sized seat base.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePressure-Care Note\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushion is designed to support pressure redistribution, but no cushion can guarantee prevention or treatment of pressure injuries. Users with fragile skin, existing pressure damage or higher clinical risk should have their seating needs assessed appropriately.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing and Positioning the Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003ePosture-Temp Pressure Relieving Cushion should support the intended body area without forcing the user into an uncomfortable posture. Consider the chair or bed dimensions, the person’s body size and the amount of firmness or contouring preferred. Small changes in placement can alter how the support feels, so it is worth taking time to position it while the user is settled in their normal sitting or lying position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCheck the fit again after a short period of use and inspect the skin where pressure or heat may build up. Covers and foam components should be cared for according to their labels so their shape and finish are maintained. Where the product is being considered for pressure care, persistent pain or significant postural needs, seek advice from an appropriate health professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat sizes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart offers 40 × 45 × 7.5 cm and 45 × 51 × 7.5 cm variants.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I choose between the two sizes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMatch the cushion to the user's seating dimensions and make sure it sits fully on the chair base without overhang or instability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat type of foam is used?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eTemperature-sensitive open-cell visco-memory foam.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does the foam respond while sitting?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBody warmth gradually softens the foam so it conforms more closely to the user's shape and increases the supported contact area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat level of pressure support does it provide?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe product is described as providing medium-level pressure redistribution.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is this different from the Medi-Soft Chair Cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Posture-Temp cushion is available in two sizes and uses a bi-elastic protective cover. The Medi-Soft Chair Cushion is a single-size 40 × 45 × 7.5 cm option.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the cover waterproof?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The protective cover is waterproof while also being designed to remain breathable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the cover stretch?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The bi-elastic two-way stretch construction allows the cover to move with the cushion and user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it stain resistant?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cover is specified as stain resistant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a wheelchair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may suit some wheelchairs if the dimensions, posture and seating setup are appropriate. For long-term wheelchair use or higher pressure-care needs, professional seating advice may be appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on an office or dining chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the chair offers a stable base large enough to support the cushion without overhang or movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it prevent pressure injuries?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo specific outcome is guaranteed. Pressure care depends on the user's condition, seating, repositioning and broader care plan.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow thick is the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth current sizes are approximately 7.5 cm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSmall\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLarge\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDepth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e51 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e7.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFoam\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eTemperature-sensitive open-cell visco-memory foam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePressure support\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eMedium pressure redistribution\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eBi-elastic, breathable, waterproof, stain-resistant and fire-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Posture-Temp","offers":[{"title":"W 450mm D 510mm H 75mm","offer_id":41676849414219,"sku":"CUB-PTPRESCUSH450","price":219.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"W 400mm D 450mm H 75mm","offer_id":41676849446987,"sku":"CUB-PTPRESCUSH400","price":199.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/4e19a355-e674b4_e5764eedae90433f9eb07dc08e1b02f6_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"lightweight-premium-self-propelled-wheelchair","title":"GF Lightweight Premium Self-Propelled Wheelchair","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Lightweight Premium Self-Propelled Wheelchair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Lightweight Premium Self-Propelled Wheelchair\u003c\/strong\u003e is the transport-friendly self-propelled option in Goldfern's manual wheelchair range. Its aluminium folding frame weighs approximately \u003cstrong\u003e10.1 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, substantially less than the steel Economy model, while 50.8 cm (20\") rear wheels allow the seated user to self-propel where appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe chair has been independently tested and approved by SGS to meet \u003cstrong\u003eAS\/NZS 3695.1:2011\u003c\/strong\u003e. It uses an \u003cstrong\u003e45.7 × 40.6 cm (18 × 16\") seat\u003c\/strong\u003e, folding backrest, removable rear wheels, attendant hand brakes and swing-away footrests, with a maximum user weight of \u003cstrong\u003e100 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhere the Lightweight Premium Fits in the Goldfern Range\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose this model when lifting and vehicle transport matter more than maximum user capacity. Compared with the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/economy-self-propelled-wheelchair\"\u003eEconomy Self-Propelled\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is around 5.4 kg lighter and adds a folding backrest, removable rear wheels, attendant brakes and tested compliance. Compared with the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/euro-premium-self-propelled-wheelchair\"\u003eEuro Premium Self-Propelled\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e, it is lighter but offers fewer seating adjustments and only one seat size.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eDesigned for Easier Transport\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe aluminium frame folds inward, the backrest folds down and the 50.8 cm (20\") rear wheels can be removed. Together, those features reduce the bulk of the chair when loading it into a vehicle or storing it between uses.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSelf-Propelled with Attendant Control\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 50.8 cm (20\") rear wheels allow user propulsion, while attendant hand brakes provide extra control from the push handles. User wheel brakes are also fitted for securing the chair when stationary.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e10.1 kg aluminium folding frame\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFolding backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePadded nylon seat and back\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAttendant hand brakes\u003c\/strong\u003e and user wheel brakes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e50.8 cm (20\") removable solid rubber rear wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e15.2 cm (6\") solid rubber front wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSwing-away footrests\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSeat belt\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e45.7 × 40.6 cm (18 × 16\") seat\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e100 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eIndependently tested and approved by SGS to \u003cstrong\u003eAS\/NZS 3695.1:2011\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12-month warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is this wheelchair best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who need a self-propelled wheelchair that is easier to fold, lift and transport than a traditional steel chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the Economy Self-Propelled model?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt uses aluminium, weighs about 10.1 kg and adds a folding backrest, removable rear wheels, attendant brakes and AS\/NZS testing. The Economy model is heavier but supports a higher user weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the Euro Premium Self-Propelled model?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Euro Premium offers more adjustable seating features and two seat-size choices, while this model prioritises low transport weight.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it self-propelled?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The 50.8 cm (20\") rear wheels allow user propulsion where appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does it weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 10.1 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e100 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 45.7 × 40.6 cm (18 × 16\").\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the backrest fold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the rear wheels be removed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo the footrests swing away?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat standard has it been tested to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAS\/NZS 3695.1:2011, independently tested and approved by SGS.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. MoveSmart ships the Goldfern Lightweight Premium Self-Propelled Wheelchair NZ-wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e100 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45.7 × 40.6 cm (18 × 16\")\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNet chair weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e10.1 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBack height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFloor-to-seat height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e47 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth between armrests\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e46 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFront wheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e15.2 cm (6\") solid rubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRear wheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50.8 cm (20\") solid rubber, removable\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e68 × 87 × 73.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAS\/NZS 3695.1:2011; independently tested and approved by SGS\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849512523,"sku":"GF-LWSPWHLCHR","price":650.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/815a7fae-e674b4_335b0fe4f22c4f299acf297416e546ef_mv2.png?v=1754901811"},{"product_id":"premium-wooden-walking-stick","title":"Premium Wooden Walking Stick","description":"\u003ch2\u003eTraditional Fixed-Height Wooden Walking Stick\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ePremium Wooden Walking Stick\u003c\/strong\u003e is a classic fixed-height walking aid with an approximately \u003cstrong\u003e88 cm handle height\u003c\/strong\u003e, polished wooden shaft, curved handgrip, decorative brass collar and rubber ferrule. It is a good fit for users who prefer the look and feel of a traditional wooden cane and already know that an 88 cm height suits them.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnlike an adjustable aluminium walking stick, this model has no push-button height settings or telescoping sections. That keeps the design simple and traditional, but it also means correct fit matters before regular use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose a Fixed-Height Wooden Stick?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA fixed wooden stick can feel more solid and visually discreet than a modern adjustable cane. The smooth curved handle provides a broad gripping area, while the brass collar adds a traditional finish at the handle joint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe trade-off is adjustability. If the user is between sizes, expects footwear or posture to change, or is unsure about the correct cane height, an adjustable walking stick may be the more practical choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eGetting the Height Right\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen standing naturally, the handle of a walking stick should sit at a comfortable height that allows the arm to remain relaxed rather than forcing the shoulder upward or the body to lean. Because this stick is fixed at approximately 88 cm, check the fit before relying on it for daily walking.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf cane height or walking technique is uncertain, a physiotherapist, occupational therapist or mobility professional can help assess the most appropriate setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFerrule and Routine Safety Checks\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rubber ferrule is the main contact point with the ground and should be checked regularly. Replace it if the rubber becomes worn smooth, split, hardened or loose. Also stop using the stick if the wooden shaft or handle joint develops a crack or other structural damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOn wet, loose or uneven surfaces, extra care is still required. A rubber ferrule improves grip but cannot eliminate the risk of slipping.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFixed height:\u003c\/strong\u003e Approx. 88 cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTraditional wooden construction\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eCurved handgrip\u003c\/strong\u003e for comfortable everyday holding.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDecorative brass collar\u003c\/strong\u003e at the handle joint.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRubber ferrule\u003c\/strong\u003e for ground contact and grip.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo height-adjustment mechanism or setup required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFunctional mobility aid with a classic appearance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow tall is the walking stick?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe fixed height is approximately 88 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the height be adjusted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. This is a fixed-height walking stick.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I know whether 88 cm is suitable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe handle should sit at a comfortable level when standing naturally without forcing the shoulder upward or requiring excessive leaning. If cane fitting is uncertain, seek advice from a mobility professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the stick made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe shaft and handle are wooden, with a decorative brass collar at the handle joint.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a rubber tip?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A rubber ferrule is fitted at the base.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the ferrule be replaced?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided a replacement with the correct shaft diameter is selected.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the ferrule be checked regularly?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Replace it if it becomes worn, hardened, split or loose.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable outdoors?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be used on suitable outdoor surfaces, with additional care on wet, loose or uneven ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be cut shorter?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAny modification can affect fit and the ferrule connection. Have alterations carried out appropriately rather than cutting the stick casually.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it a decorative walking stick or a mobility aid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is intended as a functional walking aid with a traditional decorative finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould I use it if the shaft is cracked?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Stop using a wooden walking stick if the shaft, handle joint or ferrule is damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Premium Wooden Walking Stick available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This walking stick is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixed-height wooden walking stick\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 88 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWood\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandle\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCurved wooden handgrip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetail\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBrass collar\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eReplaceable rubber ferrule\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight adjustable\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849479755,"sku":"MS-PREMWOODWS","price":59.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/2558cb05-e674b4_f96354ead13b4238acfb9a845bc6a0ad_mv2.webp?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"walking-stick-and-cane-ferrule","title":"Walking Stick and Cane Ferrule","description":"\u003ch2\u003eWalking Stick and Cane Replacement Ferrule\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese \u003cstrong\u003ereplacement rubber ferrules\u003c\/strong\u003e restore the ground-contact tip on compatible walking sticks and canes. MoveSmart offers \u003cstrong\u003e16 mm, 19 mm and 22 mm\u003c\/strong\u003e internal-size options, covering several common shaft diameters used on aluminium and wooden walking aids.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe ferrule is one of the most important wear parts on a walking stick: it provides the contact surface between the cane and the ground. Replacing a worn, hardened or loose tip can restore tread and help the stick perform as intended.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the Correct Size Matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA replacement ferrule needs to fit the shaft snugly. Measure the \u003cstrong\u003eoutside diameter of the walking-stick shaft\u003c\/strong\u003e where the ferrule fits, or measure the inside of the old ferrule if it has retained its original shape.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eNOTE:  \u003c\/strong\u003ein \u003cem\u003e\u003cspan style=\"text-decoration: underline;\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMOST\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/span\u003e\u003cstrong\u003e \u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/em\u003ecircumstances, a 19 mm ferrule would be the normal size for most aluminium walking sticks in New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart currently stocks 16 mm, 19 mm and 22 mm versions. A 19 mm ferrule is common on many standard aluminium walking sticks, but it should never be assumed without measuring first.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen Should a Ferrule Be Replaced?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCheck the rubber regularly, particularly if the walking stick is used outdoors. Replace the ferrule when the tread is badly worn, the rubber becomes smooth or hardened, cracks develop, or the tip no longer fits securely on the shaft.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA worn ferrule can reduce grip and may also change the way the stick sits on the ground. Waiting until the rubber has worn through can expose the cane shaft and damage both the walking aid and flooring.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eSimple Push-Fit Replacement\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRemove the old ferrule and clean the end of the shaft before fitting the new one. The correctly sized replacement should push on firmly and remain secure during normal use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eDo not force an undersized ferrule onto a shaft or rely on a loose oversized tip. Adhesive is normally unnecessary with a properly sized push-fit ferrule unless the walking-stick manufacturer specifically recommends otherwise.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree sizes:\u003c\/strong\u003e 16 mm, 19 mm and 22 mm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDurable rubber construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTextured non-slip base.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePush-fit replacement design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for compatible aluminium or wooden walking sticks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e19 mm is common on many standard aluminium sticks, but always measure.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat sizes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e16 mm, 19 mm and 22 mm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does the size refer to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt refers to the approximate internal diameter intended to fit over the cane shaft.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs 19 mm the most common size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is common on many aluminium walking sticks, but you should still measure your particular stick.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWill one size fit every cane?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The shaft diameter must match the ferrule.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is the ferrule installed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eRemove the old tip and push the correctly sized new ferrule firmly onto the clean end of the shaft.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDo I need adhesive?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA correctly sized push-fit ferrule normally relies on a snug fit. Do not use adhesive unless the walking-stick manufacturer specifically permits it.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow do I know when a ferrule needs replacing?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eReplace it when the tread is badly worn, the rubber is cracked or hardened, or the ferrule becomes loose.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a worn ferrule affect grip?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The ferrule is the main ground-contact surface and should remain in good condition.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan these fit wooden walking sticks?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, where the wooden shaft diameter matches one of the available sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan these fit aluminium walking sticks?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, where the shaft diameter is compatible.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShould I measure the old ferrule or the shaft?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMeasuring the shaft is usually the more reliable method, particularly if the old rubber has stretched.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Walking Stick and Cane Ferrule available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. All current ferrule sizes are available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eVariant\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNominal internal size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSmall\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e16 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMedium\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e19 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLarge\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e22 mm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eRubber\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"16mm","offer_id":41676849545291,"sku":"MS-WSFERRULE-16MM","price":8.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"19mm","offer_id":41676849578059,"sku":"MS-WSFERRULE-19MM","price":8.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"22mm","offer_id":41676849610827,"sku":"MS-WSFERRULE-22MM","price":8.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/3d7fc418-e674b4_01c6654e7a1f4452bfe1dc3fd4ddb8b5_mv2.png?v=1754901811"},{"product_id":"leg-lifter-strap","title":"Leg Lifter Strap","description":"\u003ch2\u003eLeg Lifter Strap\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eLeg Lifter Strap\u003c\/strong\u003e is a simple manual positioning aid designed to help guide a leg during everyday movements such as getting into or out of bed, moving the foot toward a wheelchair footplate or repositioning the leg onto a footstool. It measures approximately \u003cstrong\u003e99 cm \/ 99.1 cm (39\") long.\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eA hand or wrist loop at the upper end provides a larger point to hold while the reinforced lower loop supports the foot during a small controlled positioning movement.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhen a Leg Lifter Can Help\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe strap can be useful when the leg is difficult to lift or guide through the last part of a movement but the user can still control the task safely. Common examples include bringing a leg onto the bed, repositioning it after sitting down or guiding the foot onto a wheelchair footplate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is a positioning aid rather than a transfer device. The strap is not designed to lift the person's body weight, pull someone across a surface or replace a hoist, sling or hands-on assistance where those are required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCompact and Easy to Keep Nearby\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe narrow strap format makes the Leg Lifter easy to store beside the bed, in a mobility bag or with other dressing and transfer aids. There are no powered components or adjustments to manage.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eInspect the webbing, loops and internal core before use. Do not use the strap if the material is torn, the loop is damaged or the stiffened core has broken through the outer covering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApproximately 99 cm \/ 99.1 cm (39\") long\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHand\/wrist loop for controlled positioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eReinforced foot loop.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLightweight and portable.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eManual, non-powered aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned for leg positioning rather than body-weight lifting.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long is the Leg Lifter Strap?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt is approximately 99 cm, or 99.1 cm (39\"), long.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is it held?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe upper end includes a loop for the hand or wrist.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow does the foot fit into it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lower reinforced loop is positioned around the foot so the user can guide the leg with the hand loop.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it help with getting a leg onto a bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, where the user can safely control the movement and the leg lifter is appropriate for the task.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it help position a foot on a wheelchair footplate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt may help guide the leg toward the footplate when the user can do so safely from a stable seated position.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it a transfer sling?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is not designed to lift a person's body weight or replace a hoist or transfer sling.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan a carer use it to pull a person?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is intended to guide the leg, not to drag or lift the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it powered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a manual positioning aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it portable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The narrow strap format is easy to store or carry.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eShould it be inspected before use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Check the loops, webbing and rigid core for damage before each use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat if moving the leg causes pain?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eStop the movement and follow any mobility or rehabilitation advice that applies to the user rather than forcing the leg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Leg Lifter Strap available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. This positioning aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable style=\"width: 99.9655%; height: 137.2px;\"\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eOverall length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eApproximately 99 cm \/ 99.1 cm (39\")\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eUpper end\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eHand or wrist loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eLower end\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eReinforced foot loop\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003ePrimary use\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eLeg positioning\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr style=\"height: 19.6px;\"\u003e\n\u003cth style=\"width: 41.9741%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eBody-weight lifting aid\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd style=\"width: 55.4224%; height: 19.6px;\"\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart Mobility Equipment ","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849643595,"sku":"MS-LEGLIFT","price":45.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/d26f90cf-e674b4_1b3e7f844ef7433bab55ef65ffd07e54_mv2.webp?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"byacre-carbon-overland-walker","title":"byACRE Carbon Overland Walker","description":"\u003ch2\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland All-Terrain Walker\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland\u003c\/strong\u003e is a premium all-terrain rollator for people who want to keep walking beyond smooth indoor floors and paved shopping areas. Its carbon-fibre frame weighs approximately \u003cstrong\u003e6.7 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, yet supports users up to \u003cstrong\u003e150 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving it an unusual combination of low carrying weight and genuine outdoor capability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe defining feature is its large \u003cstrong\u003e26 cm pneumatic rubber tyres\u003c\/strong\u003e. At around 5 cm wide, they provide significantly more cushioning and contact with the ground than the small solid wheels found on many urban walkers. Strong front forks and sealed bearings complete a design intended for grass, gravel, dirt paths, cobblestones and other firm uneven surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eBuilt for Outdoor Walking\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Carbon Overland is the byACRE model to consider when terrain matters more than having the absolute lightest rollator. Its larger air-filled tyres absorb small impacts and surface vibration, while the 67.5 cm overall width gives the walker a broad, planted stance outdoors.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can handle a much wider range of surfaces than a conventional indoor rollator, but sensible route choice still matters. Deep sand, mud, very loose gravel, steep cross-slopes and unstable ground can challenge any wheeled walking aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePneumatic Tyres for Ride Comfort\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnlike the puncture-proof wheels used on the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/byacre-carbon-ultralight-walker\"\u003eCarbon Ultralight\u003c\/a\u003e and \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/byacre-nordic-pioneer\"\u003eNordic Pioneer\u003c\/a\u003e, the Overland uses \u003cstrong\u003eair-filled tyres with inner tubes\u003c\/strong\u003e. The benefit is extra cushioning and grip on uneven ground; the trade-off is that tyre pressure needs to be checked and punctures remain possible.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor someone who regularly walks on gravel drives, grass or rougher paths, that extra tyre compliance can make the Overland noticeably more comfortable than a smaller solid-wheel rollator.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStill Light Enough to Travel With\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eDespite its larger wheels and outdoor construction, the Overland weighs only about \u003cstrong\u003e6.7 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. The frame folds to around \u003cstrong\u003e28 cm wide\u003c\/strong\u003e, making it practical to load into many vehicles or store when not in use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThat low weight is particularly useful because all-terrain walkers are often much heavier. The Carbon Overland keeps the outdoor capability while remaining manageable for many users and family members to lift.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eErgonomic Handles and Built-In Seat\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe forward-facing handles adjust from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e83 to 96 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Their orientation encourages the user to remain close to the frame rather than reaching too far forward, which can make the walker feel easier to control.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA built-in seat sits approximately \u003cstrong\u003e62 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e from the ground and is around \u003cstrong\u003e46 cm wide\u003c\/strong\u003e, providing somewhere to rest when the walker is safely parked and the brakes are applied.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e6.7 kg carbon-fibre rollator\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e150 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e26 cm pneumatic rubber tyres\u003c\/strong\u003e with inner tubes for shock absorption.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRigid front forks and sealed wheel bearings\u003c\/strong\u003e for outdoor durability.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e83–96 cm adjustable handle height\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e46 cm seat width\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e62 cm seat height\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e67.5 cm overall width\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e74 cm length\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApprox. 28 cm folded width\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eForward-facing ergonomic handles\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBuilt-in seat\u003c\/strong\u003e for rest breaks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eArrives fully assembled\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDefender Green, Bentley Brown, Midnight Blue and Rose Gold\u003c\/strong\u003e available through MoveSmart.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCarbon Overland, Carbon Ultralight or Nordic Pioneer?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eCarbon Overland\u003c\/strong\u003e when outdoor and mixed-terrain performance is the priority. The \u003cstrong\u003eCarbon Ultralight\u003c\/strong\u003e is lighter and more compact for travel and urban use, while the \u003cstrong\u003eNordic Pioneer\u003c\/strong\u003e sits between the two with larger puncture-proof wheels and a 5.9 kg aluminium\/EPP frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIf most of your walking is on rougher outdoor surfaces, the Overland's pneumatic tyres are the feature that most clearly separates it from the other byACRE models.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Carbon-Overland_outlined-User-Manual-Rev-1.7.pdf?v=1756719134\" title=\"byACRE Overland Carbon Walkers\" target=\"_blank\"\u003ebyACRE Overland Carbon Walkers Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube-nocookie.com\/embed\/MUGKqh9RUJg?si=4zGNar7iqq7WDAFP\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Accessories\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThese accessories are compatible with the byACRE Carbon Overland. Accessories are sold separately; check the individual product details before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-overland-back-rest\"\u003ebyACRE Overland Padded Backrest\u003c\/a\u003e — padded support for seated rest breaks.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-overland-cane-holder\"\u003ebyACRE Overland Cane Holder\u003c\/a\u003e — carries a walking stick on the frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-carbon-overland-travel-bag\"\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland Travel Bag\u003c\/a\u003e — padded protection for transport and storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-pocket-bag\"\u003ebyACRE Pocket Bag\u003c\/a\u003e — compact storage for small essentials.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-carbon-overland-daypack\"\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland Day-pack\u003c\/a\u003e — larger everyday carrying capacity.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-grocery-bag\"\u003ebyACRE Grocery Bag\u003c\/a\u003e — useful for shopping and errands.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-weekend-bag\"\u003ebyACRE Weekend Bag\u003c\/a\u003e — larger removable carry bag.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-cup-holder\"\u003ebyACRE Cup Holder\u003c\/a\u003e — keeps a drink within reach.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-carbon-overland-mini-pump\"\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland Mini Pump\u003c\/a\u003e — compact pump for the Overland's pneumatic tyres.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-service-kit\"\u003ebyACRE Service Kit\u003c\/a\u003e — maintenance\/service hardware.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/byacre-carbon-overland-touch-up-pen\"\u003ebyACRE Carbon Overland Touch-Up Pen\u003c\/a\u003e — colour-matched cosmetic repair pen for superficial frame scratches.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/walker-accessories\"\u003eBrowse all Walker \u0026amp; Rollator Accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the Carbon Overland weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe walker weighs approximately 6.7 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe maximum user weight is 150 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat surfaces is it designed for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is designed for mixed and all-terrain outdoor use, including firm grass, gravel, dirt paths, cobblestones and other uneven surfaces. Always use extra care on loose, wet, steep or unstable ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size are the tyres?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe pneumatic rubber tyres are approximately 26 cm in diameter and 5 cm wide.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the tyres puncture-proof?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Overland uses air-filled pneumatic tyres with inner tubes for shock absorption, so normal tyre-pressure and puncture care applies.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the handle-height range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe handles adjust from approximately 83 cm to 96 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size is the seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe seat is approximately 46 cm wide and 62 cm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow wide is the walker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe overall width is approximately 67.5 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow long is the walker?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe overall length is approximately 74 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow compact is it when folded?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe folded width is approximately 28 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it arrive assembled?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It arrives assembled; unfold it and adjust the handles before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A built-in seat provides a place to rest when the walker is safely parked.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat colours are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart carries Defender Green, Bentley Brown, Midnight Blue and Rose Gold variants, subject to availability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan accessories be added?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Compatible accessories include the Overland Day-pack, Travel Bag, Back Rest, Cane Holder and other byACRE accessories.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.7 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandle height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e83–96 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth between handles\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e38.5–39.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e67.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFolded width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e28 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e74 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e46 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e62 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheel size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e26 cm diameter × 5 cm wide\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTyres\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePneumatic rubber with inner tubes\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCarbon fibre with aircraft-grade aluminium components\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMoveSmart colours\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDefender Green, Bentley Brown, Midnight Blue, Rose Gold\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"byACRE","offers":[{"title":"Defender Green","offer_id":41676849774667,"sku":"BYACRE-OVERLANDDG","price":1399.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Bentley Brown","offer_id":41676849807435,"sku":"BYACRE-OVERLANDBB","price":1399.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Midnight Blue","offer_id":41676849840203,"sku":"BYACRE-OVERLANDMB","price":1399.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Rose gold","offer_id":41676849872971,"sku":"BYACRE-OVERLANDRG","price":1399.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/5c586caa-e674b4_3da5c41078ee4632aa6856eee79b0a06_mv2.webp?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"chevron-adjustable-bed-cradle","title":"Chevron Adjustable Bed Cradle","description":"\u003ch2\u003eChevron Adjustable Bed Cradle\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eChevron Adjustable Bed Cradle\u003c\/strong\u003e is a lightweight aluminium frame designed to hold sheets and blankets away from the feet or lower legs. It slides between the mattress and bed base, creating clearance beneath the bedding without requiring a permanent fitting to the bed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eUnlike a fixed-height bed cradle, the Chevron adjusts from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e53 to 68 cm high\u003c\/strong\u003e. That extra flexibility can be useful with different mattress depths or where more or less bedding clearance is needed. The frame is approximately \u003cstrong\u003e48 cm wide x 50 cm long\u003c\/strong\u003e and separates into two parts for easier transport or storage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Use a Bed Cradle?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA bed cradle supports the weight of sheets and blankets above part of the body rather than allowing the bedding to rest directly on the feet or legs. This can be useful where direct contact or pressure from bedclothes is uncomfortable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cradle does not lift, position or support the user's legs. Its purpose is simply to create a raised structure for the bedding, so any separate positioning or pressure-care needs should be managed with the appropriate equipment or clinical advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable Height for Different Bed Setups\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Chevron's 53–68 cm height range allows the raised section to be set to suit the mattress and the amount of clearance required. The lower portion of the frame remains beneath the mattress while the upper section supports the bedding.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eWhen setting the height, use only as much clearance as is needed and make sure the frame remains stable. The cradle should not interfere with the user's movement, transfers, bed rails, mattress system or any powered profiling sections.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChevron Adjustable Cradle or Viking Fixed-Height Cradle?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eChevron Adjustable Bed Cradle\u003c\/strong\u003e when height flexibility is useful. Its aluminium frame adjusts from approximately 53 to 68 cm and can be separated into two parts for storage or transport.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/viking-bed-cradle\"\u003eViking Bed Cradle\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is the simpler fixed-height alternative. It uses a powder-coated steel frame measuring approximately 32 cm wide x 50 cm long x 60 cm high. Both products are designed to hold bedding away from the body; the main difference is whether adjustable height or a simple fixed frame better suits the bed setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight adjustable from 53–68 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApprox. 48 cm wide x 50 cm long\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightweight aluminium construction\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSlides between the mattress and bed base for straightforward installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be positioned at the end or side of a suitable bed where the setup allows.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned to hold bedding away from the feet or lower legs.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSplits into two parts for easier transport and storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo permanent fixing or powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is a bed cradle used for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA bed cradle supports sheets and blankets above part of the body so the bedding does not rest directly on the feet or lower legs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow high does the Chevron Bed Cradle adjust?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe frame adjusts from approximately 53 cm to 68 cm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the overall dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cradle is approximately 48 cm wide and 50 cm long, with an adjustable height of 53–68 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it fitted to the bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe lower section slides between the mattress and bed base while the raised section sits above the area where bedding clearance is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be fitted at the side of the bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, where the mattress and bed setup allow it to be positioned safely and securely. It can also be used from the foot of a suitable bed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the frame made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Chevron Adjustable Bed Cradle is made from lightweight aluminium.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it permanently attach to the bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a removable frame held in position by placement beneath the mattress.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the cradle support body weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is intended to support bedding only and must not be used as a grab rail, transfer aid or body-support device.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it raise or position the legs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. A bed cradle creates clearance beneath bedding; it does not elevate or reposition the user's legs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with an adjustable or electric bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnly where its position does not interfere with the bed's moving sections, mattress system, rails or other equipment. Check the setup carefully before use and after any change in bed position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between the Chevron and Viking bed cradles?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Chevron has an adjustable aluminium frame with a 53–68 cm height range. The Viking is a fixed-height powder-coated steel cradle measuring approximately 60 cm high. The Chevron is the better choice when height flexibility is useful.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the Chevron Bed Cradle be taken apart for storage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The frame separates into two parts, making it easier to store or transport when it is not required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Chevron Adjustable Bed Cradle available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This bed cradle is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 48 cm x L 50 cm x H 53–68 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight adjustment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e53–68 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLightweight aluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInstallation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSlides between mattress and bed base\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eConstruction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTwo-part removable frame\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Chevron","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849676363,"sku":"CUB-CHEVBEDCRDLE","price":219.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/ef77644e-e674b4_d6a17c8a6e5049039395bd7b82482a06_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"viking-bed-cradle","title":"Viking Bed Cradle","description":"\u003ch2\u003eViking Bed Cradle\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eViking Bed Cradle\u003c\/strong\u003e is a simple fixed-height frame designed to hold bed linen away from the legs or feet. The powder-coated steel frame slides between the mattress and bed base so sheets and blankets can drape over the raised section rather than resting directly on the body.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhen a Bed Cradle Can Be Useful\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA bed cradle can be helpful when the weight or contact of sheets and blankets is uncomfortable over the feet or lower legs. It does not support or reposition the user; its job is simply to create clearance beneath the bedding.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause it sits partly beneath the mattress, check that the bed base and mattress provide enough stable support and that the cradle does not interfere with adjustable-bed movement or other equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFixed-height bed-linen support frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePowder-coated steel construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSlides between the mattress and bed base.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e32 cm wide x 50 cm long x 60 cm high\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo moving or powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eUseful where direct bedding contact is uncomfortable or needs to be minimised.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKeeping Bedding Clear of Sensitive Areas\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Viking Bed Cradle creates a raised support beneath the bedcovers, helping reduce the weight or rubbing of sheets and blankets over the feet or lower legs. It can be useful where contact from bedding is uncomfortable, while still allowing normal covers to provide warmth around the supported area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003ePosition the cradle so it remains stable and does not interfere with transfers, bed adjustment or the user’s movement. Check the available mattress and bed-frame clearance before use, and make sure bedding is spread without pulling the frame out of position. The setup should be reviewed if the user has reduced sensation, fragile skin or changing clinical needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat does a bed cradle do?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt creates a raised support for sheets and blankets so the bedding does not rest directly on part of the legs or feet.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it installed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe lower section slides between the mattress and the bed base, with the raised section positioned over the area where linen clearance is needed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is it made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003ePowder-coated steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 32 cm wide, 50 cm long and 60 cm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the height adjustable?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. This is a fixed-height bed cradle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it attach permanently to the bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a removable frame that is held in position by placement beneath the mattress.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it fit every bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo universal fit is guaranteed. The mattress, base design and available clearance should be checked before use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with an adjustable bed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnly if its position does not interfere with bed profiling or other moving components. Check compatibility before using it on a powered bed.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it carry body weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is designed to support bedding, not a person or heavy objects.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it lift or reposition the legs?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It only holds bedding away from the body. Leg positioning requires a suitable support or positioning aid.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould it be checked after changing bed position?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Make sure the frame remains stable and does not interfere with the bed or user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe the powder-coated frame using a mild cleaning method suitable for the finish and dry it thoroughly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Viking Bed Cradle available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This bed cradle is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e32 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLength\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e50 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaterial\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePowder-coated steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight adjustment\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFixed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Viking","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676849709131,"sku":"CUB-VKGBEDCRDLE","price":109.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/a6319eb3-e674b4_d5756d9a0ad846ed9c8848722958ecce_mv2.jpg?v=1754901811"},{"product_id":"viking-rehab-chair-height-adjustable","title":"Viking Rehab Chair - Height Adjustable","description":"\u003ch2\u003eViking Rehab Chair – Standard and Maxi Height-Adjustable Rehabilitation Chair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eViking Rehab Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e is a strong, straightforward rehabilitation and day chair designed for people who benefit from a supportive upright seat, padded arms and adjustable seat height. It is now available in a \u003cstrong\u003eStandard\u003c\/strong\u003e configuration and two wider \u003cstrong\u003eMaxi\u003c\/strong\u003e configurations, making it easier to choose the chair around the user’s seating width as well as the required safe working load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard model has a \u003cstrong\u003e200 kg safe working load\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both Maxi models are rated to \u003cstrong\u003e250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and provide substantially more room between the armrests. All versions retain the Viking’s simple stationary design, padded seating, durable vinyl upholstery and height-adjustable frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose the Viking Rehab Chair Model That Fits the User\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaxi 550\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaxi 650\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e609S\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e609M550\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e609M650\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSafe working load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 44.5 × D 45.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 55 × D 45.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 65 × D 45.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e48–65 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e46.5–63.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e46.5–63.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth between arms\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 45.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e56 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e66 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBackrest height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 60 × D 59 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 68.5 × D 61.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 78.5 × D 61.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 11 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 13.3 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 15 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Maxi model names relate to the wider seat configurations. When selecting a chair, compare the user’s seated width with both the \u003cstrong\u003eseat width\u003c\/strong\u003e and the \u003cstrong\u003espace between the arms\u003c\/strong\u003e; safe working load alone does not determine whether a chair will fit comfortably.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy a Height-Adjustable Rehab Chair Can Be Easier to Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSeat height makes a noticeable difference to everyday chair use. A low seat requires the user to lower further and generate more effort to stand again, while a seat set too high may leave the feet poorly supported. The Viking’s adjustable legs allow the chair to be set at a practical height for the individual rather than asking the user to adapt to a fixed household chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe padded armrests provide a defined place for the hands during sitting and standing. Combined with the firm frame and relatively upright seating position, this makes the Viking a useful alternative to deep lounge furniture for users who prefer a more supportive chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSupportive Seating Without Unnecessary Complexity\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Viking Rehab Chair is intentionally simple. It has an ergonomically curved backrest, padded seat and arms, but does not add powered lift, recline or multiple seat-position controls. Once the height has been set correctly, the chair provides a stable everyday seating position without additional mechanisms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard and Maxi versions differ in width, overall footprint, weight capacity and seat-height range. The Maxi 550 provides a 55 cm wide seat and 56 cm between the arms, while the Maxi 1651 cm (650\")creases these to a 65 cm seat and 66 cm between the arms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eViking Rehab Chair or Viking Hilite?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eViking Rehab Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e when the priority is a stable padded chair with seat-height adjustment and a choice of Standard or wider Maxi configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/viking-hilite-rehab-chair-height-adjustable\"\u003eViking Hilite Rehab Chair\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e when the seating setup needs more adjustment. The Hilite adds adjustable seat depth and seat angle, a much taller contoured backrest with lumbar and neck support, and rear mobility wheels for repositioning the \u003cem\u003eunoccupied\u003c\/em\u003e chair. The Hilite is also available in Standard and Maxi sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStandard and Maxi configurations\u003c\/strong\u003e for different seating widths and capacities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e200 kg SWL\u003c\/strong\u003e on the Standard model.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e250 kg SWL\u003c\/strong\u003e on both Maxi models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable seat\u003c\/strong\u003e with model-specific adjustment ranges.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eErgonomically curved backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e for supportive upright seating.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePadded seat and armrests\u003c\/strong\u003e for everyday comfort.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDurable vinyl upholstery\u003c\/strong\u003e for straightforward cleaning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRobust powder-coated frame\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable as a supportive day chair for lounge, bedroom, dining-area and rehabilitation use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Viking_Rehab_Chair.pdf?v=1756722151\" title=\"Viking Rehab Chair Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eViking Rehab Chair Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Check Whether the Chair Will Fit\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBefore choosing a rehab chair, compare the seat width, seat depth and arm spacing with a chair the user already sits comfortably in. The user should be able to sit back against the backrest without excessive pressure at the sides, while the thighs are supported without the front edge of the seat pressing into the back of the knees.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eOnce the chair is in place, the seat height should be adjusted evenly so the frame remains level and stable. The user should have appropriate foot contact and be able to sit and stand in a controlled way. If the correct setup is uncertain, a physiotherapist, occupational therapist or other rehabilitation professional can help with individual positioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Viking Rehab Chair best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who want a stable, upright and height-adjustable day chair with padded arms and a firm frame. The wider Maxi models suit users who need additional seating space or the higher 250 kg safe working load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the safe working load?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard Viking Rehab Chair is rated to \u003cstrong\u003e200 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both Maxi models are rated to \u003cstrong\u003e250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat Maxi sizes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Maxi range includes a \u003cstrong\u003e55 cm seat\u003c\/strong\u003e with 56 cm between the arms and a \u003cstrong\u003e65 cm seat\u003c\/strong\u003e with 66 cm between the arms.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat-height range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard model adjusts from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e48–65 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both Maxi models adjust from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e46.5–63.5 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat depth?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll three configurations have an approximately \u003cstrong\u003e45.5 cm seat depth\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this an electric lift chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Viking Rehab Chair is a stationary rehabilitation\/day chair with manually adjustable seat height. It has no powered lift or recline function.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between this and the Viking Hilite?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Viking Rehab Chair focuses on simple seat-height adjustment and stable everyday support. The Hilite adds adjustable seat depth and angle, a 70 cm high contoured backrest and rear repositioning wheels.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the chair have wheels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The Viking Rehab Chair is a stationary rehabilitation chair rather than a wheeled transport chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the vinyl upholstery be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse normal care appropriate for durable vinyl upholstery and follow the manufacturer’s cleaning instructions. Avoid products that could damage the upholstery or frame finish.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there a manual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Viking Rehab Chair manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Viking Rehab Chair available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Viking Rehab Chair range is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Viking","offers":[{"title":"Standard","offer_id":43163304329291,"sku":"CUB-REHABCHR-1","price":699.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maxi 550","offer_id":43163304362059,"sku":"CUB-REHABCHR-2","price":1399.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maxi 650","offer_id":43163304394827,"sku":"CUB-REHABCHR-3","price":1499.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/931a6736-e674b4_d063a3dfec4d4a2f89eb42cf6f9dc64a_mv2.jpg?v=1754901811"},{"product_id":"viking-hilite-rehab-chair-height-adjustable","title":"Viking Hilite Rehab Chair - Height Adjustable","description":"\u003ch2\u003eViking Hilite Rehab Chair – Standard and Maxi High-Back Rehabilitation Seating\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eViking Hilite Rehab Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e is Viking’s more configurable rehabilitation and day chair, designed for users who benefit from a supportive high back together with adjustable seat height, seat depth and seat angle. The range is available in a \u003cstrong\u003eStandard\u003c\/strong\u003e model and wider, higher-capacity \u003cstrong\u003eMaxi\u003c\/strong\u003e models, so the chair can be selected around both the user’s seating dimensions and required safe working load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard Hilite has a \u003cstrong\u003e200 kg safe working load\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Maxi Hilite models increase this to \u003cstrong\u003e250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and provide wider spacing between the armrests, with 60 cm and 65 cm options available. All versions retain the Hilite’s tall contoured backrest, padded seat and arms, adjustable seating position and rear wheels for repositioning the \u003cstrong\u003eunoccupied\u003c\/strong\u003e chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoose the Hilite Model That Fits the User\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaxi 600\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaxi 650\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eManufacturer code\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610S\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610M600\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e610M650\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSafe working load\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e200 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e250 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e40–55 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e48–58 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e48–58 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e48–52 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e43–58 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e43–58 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWidth between arms\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 52 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e65 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBackrest height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e70 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 69 × D 70 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 80 × D 70 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eW 85 × D 70 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 19.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 21 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 21.6 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Maxi number refers to the wider configuration rather than simply a higher weight rating. If fit is important, check the user’s seated width and the \u003cstrong\u003espace between the arms\u003c\/strong\u003e rather than choosing on safe working load alone.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eMore Adjustment Than a Standard Day Chair\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Hilite provides adjustable seat height, depth and angle so the chair can be set up around the individual rather than relying on a fixed household chair. Seat height influences foot contact and the effort required to sit and stand. Seat depth affects how much of the thighs are supported and how comfortably the user can sit back against the backrest. Seat angle provides another way to tailor the sitting position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard and Maxi Hilite models have different adjustment ranges, so use the comparison table above when fitting the chair. The Maxi models also offer a broader seat-depth adjustment range than the Standard Hilite.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHigh Contoured Backrest with Lumbar and Neck Support\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAll Hilite models use an approximately \u003cstrong\u003e70 cm high contoured backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e shaped to provide support through the back, including lumbar and neck support. This makes the Hilite a useful option when a conventional lower-back rehab chair does not provide the preferred level of upper-body support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor a simpler chair focused primarily on height adjustment, see the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/viking-rehab-chair-height-adjustable\"\u003eViking Rehab Chair\u003c\/a\u003e, which is also available in Standard and wider Maxi configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eRear Mobility Wheels Make the Empty Chair Easier to Reposition\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eSmall mobility wheels are fitted at the rear of the Hilite. By tilting the chair back, a caregiver can roll the \u003cstrong\u003eunoccupied\u003c\/strong\u003e chair to a new position rather than lifting the full frame.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThese wheels do not turn the Hilite into a transport chair. A person should not be pushed around while seated in it; the wheels are for repositioning the empty chair only.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhich Hilite Should I Choose?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eStandard Hilite\u003c\/strong\u003e when its approximately 52 cm arm spacing, 200 kg safe working load and lower 40–55 cm seat-height range suit the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose a \u003cstrong\u003eMaxi Hilite\u003c\/strong\u003e when greater seating width or the higher 250 kg safe working load is required. The Maxi 600 provides 60 cm between the arms, while the Maxi 1651 cm (650\")creases this to 65 cm. The Maxi models also use a 48–58 cm seat-height range and 43–58 cm adjustable seat depth.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStandard and Maxi configurations\u003c\/strong\u003e to suit different seating widths and capacities.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e200 kg SWL\u003c\/strong\u003e on the Standard model.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e250 kg SWL\u003c\/strong\u003e on both Maxi models.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAdjustable seat height, depth and angle\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e70 cm high contoured backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e with lumbar and neck support.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003ePadded seat, backrest and armrests\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRear mobility wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e for repositioning the unoccupied chair.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for supportive seating in dining rooms, lounges, bedrooms and rehabilitation environments.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Viking_Hiback_Rehab_Chair.pdf?v=1756722151\" title=\"Viking Hilite Rehab Chair Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eViking Hilite Rehab Chair Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow to Set Up the Hilite for the User\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eStart by checking seat width and overall chair clearance, then set the seat height so the user has appropriate foot contact and can sit and stand in a controlled way. Seat depth should support the thighs while leaving comfortable clearance behind the knees. Seat angle can then be adjusted to suit the required sitting position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause the Hilite offers several interacting adjustments, users with more complex positioning or transfer needs may benefit from setup by an occupational therapist, physiotherapist or other rehabilitation professional.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Viking Hilite best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who want a supportive high-back rehabilitation or day chair and need more fitting options than seat-height adjustment alone. The Maxi versions provide additional width and a higher safe working load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the safe working load?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard Hilite is rated to \u003cstrong\u003e200 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both Maxi Hilite models are rated to \u003cstrong\u003e250 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat Maxi widths are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Maxi range is available with \u003cstrong\u003e60 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e or \u003cstrong\u003e65 cm between the armrests\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat-height range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Standard model adjusts from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e40–55 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Maxi models adjust from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e48–58 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the seat depth be adjusted?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Standard model adjusts from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e48–52 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e, while the Maxi models adjust from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e43–58 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the seat angle be changed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Hilite provides manual seat-angle adjustment so the sitting position can be tailored more closely to the user.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Hilite an electric lift recliner?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a manually adjustable rehabilitation\/day chair and has no powered lift or recline function.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have wheels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Rear mobility wheels make it easier to reposition the chair while it is unoccupied. The Hilite is not a wheelchair or transport chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between the Hilite and Viking Rehab Chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Hilite adds adjustable seat depth and angle, a taller contoured backrest with lumbar and neck support, and rear repositioning wheels. The Viking Rehab Chair is a simpler, lower-back model focused mainly on seat-height adjustment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there a user manual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Viking Hilite Rehab Chair manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Viking Hilite Rehab Chair available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Viking Hilite Rehab Chair range is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"Viking","offers":[{"title":"Standard","offer_id":43163309998155,"sku":"CUB-VKGHIREHAB-1","price":999.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maxi 550","offer_id":43163310030923,"sku":"CUB-VKGHIREHAB-2","price":1699.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maxi 650","offer_id":43163310063691,"sku":"CUB-VKGHIREHAB-3","price":1799.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/577eec6a-e674b4_abe6358da91948c79391e3cc96f2c92d_mv2.jpg?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"uplivin-trive-walker-rollator","title":"Uplivin Trive Walker Rollator","description":"\u003ch2\u003eUplivin Trive Walker Rollator\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eUplivin Trive\u003c\/strong\u003e is a lightweight four-wheel rollator built around a one-step double-folding aluminium frame. At approximately \u003cstrong\u003e6.5 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, it folds into a compact package for transport while still providing a seat, backrest, shopping bag and cane holder for everyday use.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe handles adjust from approximately \u003cstrong\u003e84–96 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The seat is approximately \u003cstrong\u003e58 cm high\u003c\/strong\u003e, the four wheels are \u003cstrong\u003e20.3 cm (8\")\u003c\/strong\u003e, and the published maximum user weight is \u003cstrong\u003e125 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eTrive or Gavo?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003eUplivin Trive\u003c\/strong\u003e when lightweight transport and compact folding are the priority. At approximately 6.5 kg it is much easier to lift than the Gavo, but its seat is for stationary resting only. Choose the \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/uplivin-gavo-2-in-1-rollator-wheelchair\"\u003eUplivin Gavo\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e if you need a rollator that can also convert into an attendant-pushed transport chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e6.5 kg aluminium frame\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eOne-step double folding\u003c\/strong\u003e without needing to fold separate frame sections.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e125 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e84–96 cm adjustable handle height\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e58 cm seat height\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e45 x 18 cm seat\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e20.3 cm (8\") wheels\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft silicone handgrips.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePU-finished seat, backrest and shopping bag.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eBackrest, shopping bag and cane holder included.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eTested in accordance with \u003cstrong\u003eISO 11199-2\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTwo-year warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Uplivin Trive?\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Trive is particularly useful where portability matters. Its folding system collapses both across and along the frame in one action, while the 6.5 kg weight makes it easier to lift than many conventional seated rollators.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eMade for Travel, Storage and Everyday Outings\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Trive’s key advantage is how easily it fits around everyday life. The lightweight frame is manageable when lifting the rollator into a vehicle, while the double-folding action reduces its footprint for storage at home, in a café or beside a chair. Once opened, the seat, backrest, shopping bag and cane holder provide the practical features expected from a full-size rollator without giving up portability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eGood rollator fit is just as important as low weight. Set the handles so the user can walk upright with relaxed shoulders and a comfortable bend at the elbows, then check that the brake levers can be reached and operated confidently. The seat provides a convenient place to rest after the brakes are securely parked. For frequent travel, it is worth practising the folding action and vehicle loading routine before relying on the Trive away from home.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Trive_User_manual.pdf?v=1756719131\" title=\"Uplivin Trive Walker Owners Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eUplivin Trive Walker Owners Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube-nocookie.com\/embed\/H1E8arR7zgU?si=rKHjn2Q7sEji505G\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eCompatible Accessories\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart has a dedicated accessory range for the Uplivin Trive. These accessories are available as separate MoveSmart products.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/uplivin-trive-travel-bag\"\u003eUplivin Trive Travel Bag\u003c\/a\u003e — padded transport and storage bag.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/uplivin-trive-underseat-bag\"\u003eUplivin Trive Underseat Bag\u003c\/a\u003e — extra low-positioned storage beneath the seat.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/uplivin-trive-cup-holder\"\u003eUplivin Trive Cup Holder\u003c\/a\u003e — flexible drink holder.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/uplivin-rechargeable-light\"\u003eUplivin Rechargeable Light\u003c\/a\u003e — rechargeable visibility and path light.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003ca href=\"\/products\/uplivin-trive-shopping-bag\"\u003eUplivin Trive Shopping Bag\u003c\/a\u003e — replacement\/removable PU shopping bag.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"\/collections\/walker-accessories\"\u003eBrowse all Walker \u0026amp; Rollator Accessories\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the Trive weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe published product weight is approximately 6.5 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe published maximum user weight is 125 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the handle-height range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe handles adjust from approximately 84–96 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe seat is approximately 58 cm from the ground.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat size is the seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproximately 45 cm wide x 18 cm deep.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat size are the wheels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Trive uses 20.3 cm (8\") wheels.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow small does it fold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe published folded size is approximately 31 cm long x 35 cm wide x 89 cm high.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the unfolded size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproximately 69 cm long x 65 cm wide x 84 cm high at the lowest handle setting.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include a storage bag?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A removable shopping bag is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include a cane holder?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. A cane holder is included.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan someone be pushed while sitting on the Trive?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eNo. The seat is for stationary resting. The Trive is a rollator, not a transport chair or wheelchair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow does the Trive differ from the Gavo?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Trive is the lighter and more transport-friendly option at about 6.5 kg. The Gavo is heavier but can convert into an attendant-pushed transport chair.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable outdoors?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes, for normal indoor and outdoor use on reasonably smooth surfaces. For rougher terrain, a rollator with larger wheels may be more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat standard is it tested to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Trive is tested in accordance with ISO 11199-2 for rollators.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat colours does MoveSmart currently stock?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eCurrent variants are Terracotta, British Racing Green and Gunmetal.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs there a user manual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The Uplivin Trive Walker Owners Manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eIs the Uplivin Trive available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. Current Trive colour variants are available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e6.5 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e125 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandle height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e84–96 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e58 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 x 18 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e20.3 cm (8\")\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFolded size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e31 x 35 x 89 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUnfolded size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e69 x 65 x 84 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eISO 11199-2\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 years\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Uplivin","offers":[{"title":"Terracotta","offer_id":41676850036811,"sku":"UPL-TRIVE-TCA","price":925.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"British Racing Green","offer_id":41676850069579,"sku":"UPL-TRIVE-BRG","price":925.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Gunmetal","offer_id":41676850102347,"sku":"UPL-TRIVE-GMTL","price":925.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/58267611-e674b4_96d168b6a0d44986a57456cd69d70855_mv2.webp?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"electric-lift-recliner-chair","title":"Goldfern Electric Dual Motor Lift Recliner Chair","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Dual Motor Electric Lift Recliner Chair\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Dual Motor Electric Lift Recliner Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e is an everyday powered lift chair that combines sit-to-stand assistance with independent backrest and leg-rest adjustment. The twin-motor design allows the upper body and legs to be positioned separately, giving more flexibility than a linked single-motor recliner.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe chair supports users up to \u003cstrong\u003e150 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e and has a seat approximately \u003cstrong\u003e44 cm wide\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e53 cm deep\u003c\/strong\u003e. MoveSmart offers Steel Grey, Sandstone and Denim upholstery options.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eIndependent Back and Leg Adjustment\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eWith two motors, the backrest can recline without automatically raising the leg rest to the same degree, and the leg rest can be adjusted without forcing a matching backrest position. That makes it easier to find positions for reading, watching television, resting or simply changing posture during the day.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003ePowered Lift Assistance\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe lift function raises and tilts the chair forward to assist the transition from sitting toward standing. It is intended to reduce the amount of effort needed to rise from the chair, but the user still needs an appropriate transfer plan and enough balance to stand safely once supported.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eChoosing the Right Goldfern Lift Chair\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThis standard dual-motor chair is the more compact option in Goldfern's current lift-chair range. Its seat is approximately \u003cstrong\u003e44 cm wide\u003c\/strong\u003e and the chair measures around \u003cstrong\u003e76.5 cm overall\u003c\/strong\u003e. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/heavy-duty-dual-motor-lift-chair\" title=\"Goldfern Heavy Duty Dual Motor Lift Recliner Chair\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Heavy Duty Dual Motor Lift Chair\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e increases the seat width to about 54.5 cm and user capacity to 220 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSeat width, depth and height all affect how well a lift chair fits. A chair that is too deep can make it difficult to sit fully back while keeping the feet supported, while a chair that is too wide may provide less lateral support. MoveSmart can help compare the dimensions before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eBattery Backup and Practical Home Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn external battery backup provides limited backup operation during a power outage when correctly maintained. The backrest can be removed for easier delivery and installation, and magazine pockets are fitted on both sides.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe extra-long hand-control cord allows the controller to be positioned on either side of the chair to suit the room layout and user preference.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDual-motor system\u003c\/strong\u003e for independent backrest and leg-rest adjustment.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eElectric lift function\u003c\/strong\u003e for sit-to-stand assistance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e150 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e44 cm seat width\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e53 cm seat depth\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e3M soil and stain inhibitor fabric protection\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSteel and wood frame construction\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExternal battery backup\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eRemovable backrest\u003c\/strong\u003e for easier transport and installation.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMagazine pockets on both sides\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eExtra-long hand-control cord\u003c\/strong\u003e suitable for left- or right-side use.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApproximately \u003cstrong\u003e174 cm long when fully reclined\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSteel Grey, Sandstone and Denim upholstery options.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Lift_Chair_Installation_User_Manual_2.pdf?v=1756718430\" title=\"Goldfern Lift Chair Range (Standard and HD) Owners Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Electric Lift Chair Range (Standard and HD) Owners Manual\u003c\/strong\u003e\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWho is this Goldfern lift chair best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who want a standard-width dual-motor lift recliner with independent back and leg adjustment and a maximum user weight of 150 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/heavy-duty-dual-motor-lift-chair\" title=\"Goldfern Heavy Duty Dual Motor Lift Recliner Chair\"\u003eGoldfern Heavy Duty Lift Chair\u003c\/a\u003e?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe Heavy Duty model has a wider seat and supports users up to 220 kg. This standard model is narrower and more compact.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat does dual motor mean?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eThe backrest and leg rest can be adjusted independently rather than moving together as one linked mechanism.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the chair help with standing up?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The powered lift function raises and tilts the chair forward to assist the transition from sitting toward standing.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003e150 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat width?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproximately 44 cm between the armrests.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat depth?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproximately 53 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproximately 49 cm in the normal seated position.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow wide is the chair overall?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproximately 76.5 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow much does the chair weigh?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproximately 59 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eHow long is it when fully reclined?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eApproximately 174 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat happens during a power outage?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eAn external battery backup is included. Keep it maintained according to the chair instructions so backup operation is available when required.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eDoes the backrest come off?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. The removable backrest can make delivery and installation easier.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat colours are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eSteel Grey, Sandstone and Denim, subject to availability.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eActuator 12 months, remote 12 months and frame 24 months.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\n\u003cp\u003eYes. MoveSmart can arrange delivery of lift chairs to customers across New Zealand. Get in touch if you would like help confirming chair size or delivery arrangements before ordering.\u003c\/p\u003e\n\u003ctable\u003e\n\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e150 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e53 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e44 cm inside arms\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHeight to seat\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e49 cm standard; 75 cm elevated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFloor-to-arm height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e62 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBack height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e66.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall width\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e76.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e109 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e59 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBase size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e61.5 × 72.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFully reclined length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 174 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eColour Options\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSteel Grey, Sandstone, Denim\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eActuator 12 months; remote 12 months; frame 24 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\n\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Steel Grey","offer_id":42093279674443,"sku":"GF-ELCLFTCHRD-4","price":1795.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Sandstone","offer_id":41716509442123,"sku":"GF-ELCLFTCHRD-2","price":1795.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Denim","offer_id":41716509474891,"sku":"GF-ELCLFTCHRD-3","price":1795.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Standard_Lift_Chair-optimized-20261011.webp?v=1791681123"},{"product_id":"foot-and-toe-cleaning-brush","title":"Foot and Toe Cleaning Brush","description":"\u003ch2\u003eLong-Handle Foot and Toe Cleaning Brush\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eLong-Handle Foot and Toe Cleaning Brush\u003c\/strong\u003e is a bathing and personal-care aid designed for people who find it difficult to bend far enough to comfortably wash their feet. The extended handle brings the cleaning head closer to the user, which can make routine foot hygiene easier from a stable seated or standing position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe head has two usable surfaces: softer bristles for everyday washing and a firmer textured side for more thorough scrubbing of areas such as the soles. This gives it more versatility than a simple single-surface bath brush while keeping the tool lightweight and straightforward to use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eDesigned to Reduce Reaching and Bending\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe main benefit is reach. Instead of bringing the foot all the way toward the hands, the longer handle allows the brush to reach down toward the feet. This can be useful for people with reduced flexibility, limited hip or knee movement, or anyone who simply prefers a longer bathing tool.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is still important to use the brush from a stable position. In a wet bathroom, avoid leaning or stretching beyond your comfortable balance.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSoft Brush or Firmer Scrubber?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse the softer bristle side for normal washing around the feet and toes. The firmer textured side provides more scrubbing action for tougher areas such as the soles, but it should be used gently—particularly where skin is fragile, sensitive or sensation is reduced.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLong handle:\u003c\/strong\u003e Extra reach for washing the feet and toes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eDual-sided head:\u003c\/strong\u003e Softer bristles on one side and a firmer textured scrubber on the other.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eReduced bending:\u003c\/strong\u003e Helps bring the cleaning surface to the feet.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eBath and shower use:\u003c\/strong\u003e Suitable for normal personal-care routines.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightweight manual design:\u003c\/strong\u003e No powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHanging storage:\u003c\/strong\u003e Includes a hook and adhesive pad for convenient drying and storage.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho may find a long-handle foot brush useful?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be useful for people who find it uncomfortable or difficult to bend far enough to reach their feet during bathing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the two sides of the cleaning head for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe softer bristles are intended for everyday washing, while the firmer textured side gives additional scrubbing action for areas such as the soles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used between the toes?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, where the brush can be positioned comfortably and gently. Avoid forcing the head into tight or sensitive areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in the shower or bath?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It is intended for normal bathroom use, provided the user can maintain a stable and safe position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the long handle eliminate the need to bend?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt reduces how far you need to reach, but the amount of bending required will depend on your height, position and flexibility.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the textured side suitable for sensitive feet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUse caution. People with fragile skin, reduced sensation or known foot-care problems should avoid aggressive scrubbing and follow any relevant professional advice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan soap or body wash be used with it?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Use a cleansing product that is suitable for your skin and rinse the brush thoroughly afterwards.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the brush be cleaned after use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eRinse away soap and debris thoroughly and allow the brush to dry in a well-ventilated area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the included adhesive pad for?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt provides a convenient hanging point for the supplied hook so the brush can be stored off the floor and allowed to dry.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow does this differ from a basic long-handle foot scrub brush?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis model combines two different cleaning surfaces in one head, giving a choice between softer brushing and firmer scrubbing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhen should the brush be replaced?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eReplace it if the bristles, textured surface, handle or hanging components become damaged or difficult to keep clean.\u003c\/p\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676850167883,"sku":"MS-TOECLNBRUSH","price":25.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":false}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/eefee3db-e674b4_b0e2506fccb34c72bf80b6e0cca9745b_mv2.webp?v=1754901811"},{"product_id":"ergonomic-vegetable-peeler-no-grip-required","title":"Ergonomic Vegetable Peeler (no grip required)","description":"\u003ch2\u003eHand-Supported Ergonomic Vegetable Peeler\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eErgonomic Vegetable Peeler\u003c\/strong\u003e is designed to make everyday peeling easier to control without relying on the narrow pinch grip used by a conventional straight-handled peeler. Instead, the tool sits across the hand with broad non-slip contact surfaces, while a stainless steel blade peels suitable fruit and vegetables.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis style can be useful for people who find gripping a slim utensil uncomfortable or tiring, including users with reduced hand strength, stiffness or limited dexterity. It does not make peeling completely grip-free — the user still needs enough hand control to position the tool safely — but it changes where and how the hand applies force.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Hand-Supported Shape Can Be Easier\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA traditional peeler is usually held between the fingers and palm, which can require sustained pinching while the wrist guides the blade. The broader ergonomic design spreads contact across more of the hand and can reduce reliance on a tight fingertip grip.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eFor many users, that makes the motion feel more natural when peeling common produce such as potatoes, carrots and apples. The exact benefit will depend on the person's hand function, preferred peeling direction and the size and shape of the food being prepared.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSimple Food Preparation Without Interchangeable Parts\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe peeler uses a fixed stainless steel blade, so there are no blade cartridges or small attachments to swap between uses. That keeps the tool simple to pick up, clean and store.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eAs with any sharp kitchen tool, use it on a stable work surface and keep fingers clear of the cutting edge. If the user has substantially reduced sensation or hand control, another preparation method or assistance may be safer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eChoosing Between MoveSmart Peeler Options\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose this \u003cstrong\u003ehand-supported ergonomic peeler\u003c\/strong\u003e when reducing reliance on a narrow handle is the main priority. The \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/easy-grip-vegetable-peeler-set\"\u003eEasy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is a better fit when you want three separate tools for peeling, grating and shredding with broader conventional-style handles.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHand-supported ergonomic design\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned to reduce reliance on a tight conventional peeler grip.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStainless steel peeling blade\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNon-slip finger and hand contact surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSuitable for common produce such as potatoes, carrots and apples.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact, lightweight kitchen aid.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo interchangeable blades or powered parts.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it require absolutely no grip?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo hand tool is completely grip-free. The design is intended to reduce reliance on a tight pinch grip compared with a conventional narrow-handled peeler.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the blade made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStainless steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat foods can it peel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt can be used with suitable fruit and vegetables such as potatoes, carrots and apples.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used with wet hands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe non-slip contact surfaces are intended to improve control, but hands and the tool should still be kept as clean and dry as practical.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it suitable for left-handed users?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe hand-supported shape may suit either hand, subject to the user's preferred peeling direction and control.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the blade sharp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Treat it as a normal kitchen blade and keep fingers clear of the cutting edge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used by someone with weak hands?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may reduce the need for a narrow pinch grip, but the user still needs enough hand control to position the tool safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include a scrub brush?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current listing is for the peeler itself; no additional cleaning-brush function should be assumed unless it is present on the supplied item.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is this different from the Easy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis model uses a hand-supported shape to reduce reliance on a narrow handle. The Easy Grip set provides three separate handled tools for peeling, grating and shredding.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWash using a method suitable for stainless steel and the handle material, then dry thoroughly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be stored?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStore it so the blade cannot be contacted accidentally.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Ergonomic Vegetable Peeler available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This kitchen aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eProduct type\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eHand-supported vegetable peeler\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBlade\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGrip style\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eBroad ergonomic hand support with non-slip contact areas\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInterchangeable blades\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003ePower required\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676850135115,"sku":"MS-ERGOVEGPEEL","price":15.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/4f6fdade-e674b4_108b17553a7346e9b00fb2d791349162_mv2.webp?v=1754901811"},{"product_id":"easy-grip-vegetable-peeler-set","title":"Easy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set","description":"\u003ch2\u003eEasy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eEasy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set\u003c\/strong\u003e is a three-piece food-preparation set designed to make common peeling, grating and shredding tasks easier to manage with a broader, softer handle than many conventional kitchen utensils. Each tool uses a textured grip and stainless steel working edge, with colour-coded handles that make the three functions easy to tell apart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe set can be useful for anyone who prefers a larger gripping surface during food preparation, including people who find narrow kitchen-tool handles uncomfortable or awkward to control. It remains a set of sharp manual utensils, so the user still needs enough hand control and coordination to work safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eThree Tools for Different Preparation Tasks\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eRather than using one interchangeable head, the set includes three separate tools. Their working edges provide peeling, grating and shredding functions for suitable fruit and vegetables, so the user can select the tool that best matches the job.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe separate-tool format also keeps operation simple: there are no blades to change and no small parts to swap between tasks.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy the Broader Handle Can Help\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMany ordinary peelers rely on a narrow handle that needs to be held firmly between the fingers and palm. The Easy Grip design provides a broader, textured contact area, which can feel easier to stabilise for users who prefer to spread the load across more of the hand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt does not eliminate the need for grip or control, and suitability will vary from person to person. If the user has very limited hand function, reduced sensation or difficulty safely controlling sharp kitchen tools, another preparation method or assistance may be more appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSimple Everyday Kitchen Aid\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe stainless steel working surfaces are suited to normal food-preparation use on compatible produce. After use, clean the tools promptly and dry them thoroughly so food residue does not remain around the blades or grating surfaces.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003cstrong\u003eMaterial note:\u003c\/strong\u003e the handle material is not confirmed as latex-free. Users who need to avoid latex should not assume this set is suitable without further confirmation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree-piece set\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSeparate tools for peeling, grating and shredding suitable produce.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft textured easy-grip handles.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStainless steel peeling and grating surfaces.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eColour-coded handles help distinguish the tools.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo interchangeable blades or assembly required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompact and lightweight.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan generally be held in either hand depending on the task and individual cutting edge.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow many tools are included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThree separate tools are included.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat tasks can the set perform?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe set provides peeling, grating and shredding functions for suitable fruit and vegetables.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the working edges made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe peeling and grating surfaces are stainless steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat makes the handles easier to hold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe handles use a broader soft-textured surface rather than the narrow hard handle found on many traditional peelers.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the tools be used with either hand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThey can generally be held in either hand, although ease of use depends on the user, the task and the direction of the individual cutting edge.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the tools latex-free?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eLatex-free status is not confirmed for the handle material, so do not rely on this set where latex avoidance is essential.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre the blades sharp?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The peeling and grating edges should be treated as sharp kitchen tools and handled carefully.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan they be used on all foods?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. Use each tool only on produce that is appropriate for its blade or grating surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDo I need to change blades between functions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The set uses three separate tools, so there are no small interchangeable blades to remove or fit.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan someone with reduced hand strength use them?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe broader textured handles may be helpful for some users, but sufficient control is still required to use sharp kitchen tools safely.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the set be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eClean the tools promptly after use using a method appropriate for the stainless steel and handle materials, then dry them thoroughly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Easy Grip Vegetable Peeler Set available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This kitchen aid is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSet size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e3 tools\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFunctions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePeeling, grating and shredding\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWorking material\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eHandles\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSoft textured easy-grip design\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eInterchangeable blades\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNo\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eLatex-free status\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNot confirmed\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676850397259,"sku":"MS-EGRPVEGPEEL","price":20.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/ad277f56-e674b4_db09571b01794779884aa58020d9c7bb_mv2.webp?v=1754901811"},{"product_id":"360-rotating-car-seat-cushion","title":"360° Rotating Car Seat Cushion","description":"\u003ch2\u003e360° Rotating Car Seat Cushion\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e360° Rotating Car Seat Cushion\u003c\/strong\u003e creates a padded swivelling surface on a suitable vehicle or household seat. Instead of having to twist the hips and trunk as much when turning to sit or stand, the user can rotate with the cushion through a full 360 degrees.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis can make getting in and out of a car feel more straightforward for people who find turning on a fixed seat awkward. The memory-foam cushion also adds a layer of padding, while the lightweight design makes it easy to move between suitable seats.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eHow It Can Help with Vehicle Transfers\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eCar seats often require the body to turn while the feet remain outside the vehicle. A rotating cushion can reduce how much of that turning has to come from the user's hips and torso by allowing the seated surface itself to rotate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe cushion does not lift the user or replace transfer assistance where that is needed. Its role is simply to provide a smoother turning surface on a seat that is already broad, stable and suitable for the cushion.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePortable for Home or Car Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eBecause it does not require installation, the cushion can also be used on compatible dining chairs or other stable household seating. It is best on a reasonably flat seat with enough surface area to keep the cushion centred.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eHighly contoured, narrow or strongly sloping seats may not provide a secure base. In a vehicle, always make sure the cushion does not interfere with the seatbelt, seat controls or driving position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e360° rotation\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMemory-foam cushioning.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSoft polyester cover.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003ePortable between suitable seats.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCan be used on compatible vehicle, office or dining seats.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNo installation or powered components.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDesigned to reduce the need for twisting on a fixed seat.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eCheck the Seat Before Use\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe underlying seat must be broad, stable and shaped so the cushion can sit securely. Highly contoured, narrow or sloping seats may not provide a stable base.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far does the cushion rotate?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt rotates through 360 degrees.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is inside the cushion?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA memory foam core.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the cover made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current product uses a soft polyester cover.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used in a car?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, where the car seat provides a stable surface and the cushion does not interfere with seatbelt use or vehicle controls.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on a dining chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, on a stable chair with enough flat seating area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be used on an office chair?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt may be suitable, but avoid unstable rolling or swivelling chair setups where the combined movement could make transfers less controlled.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it lift the user?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It rotates only; it is not a lifting device.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it replace a transfer aid?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. If a person needs more than a rotating surface for a safe transfer, another aid or assistance may be required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the setup be tested first?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Check that the cushion remains centred and stable before relying on it during a transfer.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it affect sitting height?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The cushion adds some height, which can alter leg position and available headroom in a vehicle.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eClean the cover according to the material-care instructions and keep the rotating base free from debris.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the 360° Rotating Car Seat Cushion available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This rotating seat cushion is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eRotation\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e360°\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCushion\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMemory foam\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCover\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePolyester\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eUse\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eCompatible vehicle and household seats\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"MoveSmart","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676850430027,"sku":"MS-360ROTSEAT","price":55.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/d8dd15c6-e674b4_c8058cea1e1d4a51a06003b52ddd58f3_mv2.webp?v=1754901810"},{"product_id":"merits-roadster-mobility-scooter","title":"Merits Roadster Mobility Scooter","description":"\u003ch2\u003eMerits Roadster Mobility Scooter\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMerits Roadster Mobility Scooter\u003c\/strong\u003e is the straightforward mid-size all-rounder in MoveSmart's Merits range. It combines a roomy driving position, adjustable seat and tiller, strong 75Ah batteries and automatic speed reduction in turns without the size and complexity of the larger \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/merits-urban-mobility-scooter\"\u003eUrban\u003c\/a\u003e or \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/merits-cross-country-mobility-scooter\"\u003eCross Country\u003c\/a\u003e models.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Roadster supports users up to \u003cstrong\u003e159 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e, reaches up to \u003cstrong\u003e12 km\/h\u003c\/strong\u003e, and has a stated maximum range of up to approximately \u003cstrong\u003e45 km\u003c\/strong\u003e under suitable conditions.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhere the Roadster Fits in the Merits Range\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/merits-yoga-portable-travel-scooter\"\u003eYoga\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is the compact folding travel scooter. The \u003cstrong\u003eRoadster\u003c\/strong\u003e is the value-focused mid-size everyday model. The \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/merits-indigo-mobility-scooter\"\u003eIndigo\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e adds a more sophisticated LCD dashboard and additional storage. The \u003cstrong\u003eUrban\u003c\/strong\u003e steps up to 182 kg capacity, larger 35.6 cm (14\") wheels and up to 56 km range, while the \u003cstrong\u003eCross Country\u003c\/strong\u003e is the high-capacity outdoor\/twin-seat model.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the Roadster when you want a substantial everyday scooter with good legroom and battery capacity but do not need the extra size, carrying capacity or technology of the larger Merits models.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e27.9 cm (11\") Tyres and Ground Clearance\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Roadster uses \u003cstrong\u003e27.9 cm (11\") pneumatic tyres\u003c\/strong\u003e and has approximately \u003cstrong\u003e9.5 cm ground clearance\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e75Ah Batteries and 45 km Stated Range\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo \u003cstrong\u003e12V 75Ah batteries\u003c\/strong\u003e support a stated maximum range of up to approximately \u003cstrong\u003e45 km\u003c\/strong\u003e. Actual range varies with user weight, gradients, terrain, tyre pressure, battery condition, temperature and driving style.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAdjustable Seating and Suspension\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe high-back seat swivels and adjusts in height, while the tiller and armrests can also be adjusted to suit the user. Adjustable suspension helps smooth normal path and road irregularities.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eAutomatic Turn-Speed Reduction\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eAn automatic half-speed turning sensor reduces speed in corners to assist with control. Electromagnetic braking, LED lighting and indicators complete the everyday safety equipment.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e159 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e400W rated motor\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e2 x 12V 75Ah batteries\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to approximately 45 km stated range\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaximum speed up to 12 km\/h\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e27.9 cm (11\") pneumatic tyres\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApprox. 9.5 cm ground clearance\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAutomatic half-speed turning sensor\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eElectromagnetic brakes\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable high-back swivel seat.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eHeight-adjustable steering column.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFully adjustable armrests.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eAdjustable suspension.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eLED lighting and indicators.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFront carry basket and generous foot space.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Roadster_Owners_Manual.pdf?v=1756197729\" title=\"Merits S745B Roadster Owners Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eMerits S745B Roadster Scooter Owners Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Merits Roadster best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who want a comfortable mid-size everyday scooter with strong battery capacity and straightforward controls, without moving to a larger heavy-duty model.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is the Roadster different from the Indigo?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth are mid-size scooters, but the Indigo places more emphasis on its LCD dashboard and additional lockable storage. The Roadster is the simpler value-focused all-rounder.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the Urban?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Urban is larger and more powerful, with 182 kg capacity, 35.6 cm (14\") wheels and up to 56 km stated range. The Roadster is the more compact, lower-cost mid-size choice.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e159 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum speed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to 12 km\/h.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the stated range?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to approximately 45 km under suitable conditions. Actual range varies with load, terrain, gradients, battery condition, temperature and driving style.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat batteries does it use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo 12V 75Ah batteries.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat motor does it have?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA 24V DC motor rated at 400W.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size are the wheels?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt uses 27.9 cm (11\") pneumatic tyres.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the ground clearance?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 9.5 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the turning radius?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 185 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it slow automatically when turning?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the seat swivel?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The high-back seat swivels and is height adjustable.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat colours does MoveSmart currently carry?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart currently lists Ocean Blue, Gold, Tuscan Red, Midnight Blue and Fairway Green variants, subject to availability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this mobility scooter available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe can and do deliver to customers across New Zealand — however, mobility scooters and power chairs are more complex products and can be sizeable, so we generally recommend finding a local retailer who can provide hands-on service and ongoing support. It is also a good idea to test-drive or trial a mobility scooter before committing to a purchase. MoveSmart focuses its sales and servicing within the Central Plateau region, but we are always happy to chat. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/pages\/contact\"\u003eGet in touch\u003c\/a\u003e and we can offer advice, suggest a trusted dealer closer to you, or work with you to tailor a solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eS745B\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e159 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum speed\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 km\/h\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to approx. 45 km\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTurning radius\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 185 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGround clearance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 9.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMotor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC 24V, 400W rated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eBattery\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e2 x 12V 75Ah\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 64 cm wide x 140 cm long\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e27.9 cm (11\") pneumatic tyres\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMoveSmart colours\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eOcean Blue, Gold, Tuscan Red, Midnight Blue, Fairway Green\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Merits","offers":[{"title":"Ocean Blue","offer_id":42480781787211,"sku":"GF-MERITSRDSTR-OB","price":5900.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Gold","offer_id":41676850462795,"sku":"GF-MERITSRDSTR-G","price":5900.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Tuscan Red","offer_id":41676850495563,"sku":"GF-MERITSRDSTR-TR","price":5900.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Midnight Blue","offer_id":41676850528331,"sku":"GF-MERITSRDSTR-MB","price":5900.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Fairway Green","offer_id":42480781754443,"sku":"GF-MERITSRDSTR-FG","price":5900.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Merits_Roadster_Ocean_Blue.jpg?v=1779423863"},{"product_id":"merits-cross-country-mobility-scooter","title":"Merits Cross Country Mobility Scooter","description":"\u003ch2\u003eMerits Cross Country Mobility Scooter\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eMerits Cross Country Mobility Scooter\u003c\/strong\u003e is the high-capacity outdoor model in MoveSmart's Merits range. It is built for users who need a substantial four-wheel scooter with a \u003cstrong\u003e227 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e, independent suspension, 35.6 cm (14\") pneumatic tyres and the option of either a single or twin seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eA \u003cstrong\u003e650W rated motor\u003c\/strong\u003e and 160A controller provide the drivetrain, while the wide wheelbase and suspension on all four wheels make the Cross Country better suited to longer outdoor journeys and suitable uneven surfaces than a compact or mid-size scooter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhere the Cross Country Fits in the Merits Range\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/merits-yoga-portable-travel-scooter\"\u003eYoga\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is the compact folding travel model. The \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/merits-roadster-mobility-scooter\"\u003eRoadster\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/merits-indigo-mobility-scooter\"\u003eIndigo\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e are mid-size everyday scooters. The \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/merits-urban-mobility-scooter\"\u003eUrban\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e is the long-range all-round community model. The \u003cstrong\u003eCross Country\u003c\/strong\u003e is the high-capacity outdoor choice, particularly where a 227 kg user rating or twin-seat option is important.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the Cross Country when carrying capacity, suspension and outdoor stability matter more than compact dimensions. Its overall size and turning circle mean it needs more room to manoeuvre and store than the smaller Merits scooters.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eIndependent Suspension and 35.6 cm (14\") Pneumatic Tyres\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eIndependent front and rear suspension, with shock absorption at all four wheels, works with \u003cstrong\u003e35.6 cm (14\") pneumatic tyres\u003c\/strong\u003e to provide cushioning on suitable outdoor surfaces. Pneumatic tyres generally give a softer ride than solid tyres, but they also require normal pressure checks and can puncture.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e15 km\/h Maximum Speed\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Cross Country has a maximum speed of approximately \u003cstrong\u003e15 km\/h\u003c\/strong\u003e, giving it a higher cruising speed than many conventional mobility scooters while retaining the substantial chassis, suspension and carrying capacity expected from this heavy-duty model.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003e50 km Stated Range\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Cross Country is listed with a maximum travel range of up to approximately \u003cstrong\u003e50 km\u003c\/strong\u003e under suitable conditions. Actual range varies with user weight, passenger load where applicable, terrain, gradients, tyre pressure, battery condition, temperature and driving style.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eSingle-Seat and Twin-Seat Options\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eMoveSmart carries both single-seat and twin-seat configurations. The twin-seat option is intended for users who specifically need side-by-side seating and have sufficient storage and manoeuvring space for the wider setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe scooter's overall maximum load remains important; do not assume the twin-seat version doubles the rated carrying capacity.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e227 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eMaximum speed approximately 15 km\/h\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e650W rated motor\u003c\/strong\u003e with 160A controller.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIndependent front and rear suspension\u003c\/strong\u003e with shock absorbers on all four wheels.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e35.6 cm (14\") pneumatic tyres\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eUp to approximately 50 km stated range\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eAutomatic half-speed turning sensor\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eElectromagnetic braking\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLED lighting system\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eHeight-adjustable seat and tiller\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eFully adjustable armrests\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eDashboard storage and large front basket.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e10 cm ground clearance\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSingle-seat and twin-seat options\u003c\/strong\u003e through MoveSmart.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Cross_Country_User_Manual.pdf?v=1756198480\" title=\"Merits S344A Cross Country Owners Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eMerits S344A Cross Country Scooter Owners Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ciframe width=\"560\" height=\"315\" src=\"https:\/\/www.youtube-nocookie.com\/embed\/VxVyUdu7j2E?si=WKN06ABwhwNy3r6X\" title=\"YouTube video player\"\u003e\u003c\/iframe\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWho is the Merits Cross Country best suited to?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt suits users who need a high-capacity outdoor mobility scooter with substantial suspension, large pneumatic tyres and more carrying capability than a typical mid-size scooter.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is it different from the Merits Urban?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Cross Country has the higher 227 kg user rating and a twin-seat option. The Urban is a newer single-seat all-rounder with a 182 kg rating and up to 56 km stated range.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e227 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum speed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 15 km\/h.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far can it travel on one charge?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eUp to approximately 50 km under suitable conditions. Actual range varies with load, terrain, gradients, tyre pressure, battery condition, temperature and driving style.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat motor does it use?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eA 24V DC motor rated at 650W, with a 160A controller.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size are the tyres?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e35.6 cm (14\") pneumatic tyres.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have suspension?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Independent front and rear suspension with shock absorbers on all four wheels.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the ground clearance?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 10 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the turning radius?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 167 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it slow automatically in turns?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. An automatic half-speed turning sensor reduces speed in corners.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eAre single and twin seats available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. MoveSmart carries both configurations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat colours are available through MoveSmart?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCurrent MoveSmart variants are Maroon and Navy, subject to availability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs this mobility scooter available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWe can and do deliver to customers across New Zealand — however, mobility scooters and power chairs are more complex products and can be sizeable, so we generally recommend finding a local retailer who can provide hands-on service and ongoing support. It is also a good idea to test-drive or trial a mobility scooter before committing to a purchase. MoveSmart focuses its sales and servicing within the Central Plateau region, but we are always happy to chat. \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/pages\/contact\"\u003eGet in touch\u003c\/a\u003e and we can offer advice, suggest a trusted dealer closer to you, or work with you to tailor a solution.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSpecification\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eModel\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eS344A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e227 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum speed\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 15 km\/h\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum range\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eUp to approx. 50 km\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTurning radius\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 167 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eGround clearance\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 10 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMotor\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eDC 24V, 650W rated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eController\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e160A\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall dimensions\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApprox. 71 cm wide x 152 cm long x 135 cm high (single-seat configuration)\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWheels\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e35.6 cm (14\") pneumatic tyres\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMoveSmart variants\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eMaroon or Navy; Single Seat or Twin Seat\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Merits","offers":[{"title":"Maroon \/ Single Seat","offer_id":41676850626635,"sku":"GF-MRTCC-M-SS","price":7990.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Maroon \/ Twin Seat","offer_id":41676850561099,"sku":"GF-MRTCC-M-TS","price":8990.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Navy \/ Single Seat","offer_id":41676850659403,"sku":"GF-MRTCC-N-SS","price":7990.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Navy \/ Twin Seat","offer_id":41676850593867,"sku":"GF-MRTCC-N-TS","price":8990.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/5e3b1d44-e674b4_0427c98a8d764b6e98aac3762b33bea0_mv2.jpg?v=1754901815"},{"product_id":"viking-folding-shower-seat","title":"Viking Folding Shower Seat","description":"\u003ch2\u003eViking Wall-Mounted Folding Shower Seat\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eViking Folding Shower Seat\u003c\/strong\u003e is a wall-mounted stainless-steel shower seat with a wipe-clean PVC top. It folds upward when not in use, leaving approximately \u003cstrong\u003e13 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e projection from the wall in the folded position.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eStandard or Padded Viking Shower Seat?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose this standard model when you want the simpler wipe-clean PVC seat surface. The \u003cstrong\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/viking-folding-padded-shower-seat\"\u003eViking Folding Padded Shower Seat\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/strong\u003e uses the same wall-mounted folding concept but adds a sealed waterproof padded surface for users who prefer extra cushioning.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e130 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWall-mounted folding design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eStainless-steel frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEasy-clean PVC seat top.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e80 cm wide x 32 cm deep\u003c\/strong\u003e seat.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e45 cm overall depth\u003c\/strong\u003e when lowered.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e13 cm folded depth\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eListed to S4121 NZ standard compliance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMust be installed by a suitably qualified person into sound wall construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Viking_Shower_Seat.pdf?v=1756893958\" title=\"Viking Folding Shower Seat Manual\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eViking Folding Shower Seat Manual\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eInstallation Matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wall structure and fixings carry the user's load, so correct installation is essential. The seat should only be installed into a suitable structurally sound wall using fixings appropriate to the wall construction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eComfortable Positioning in the Shower\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eViking Folding Shower Seat can make washing more manageable by providing a defined seated position and reducing the time a person needs to remain standing on a wet surface. When choosing a shower seat, consider the user’s preferred transfer direction, the amount of trunk or arm support required, and whether a caregiver needs room to assist from the front or side.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasure the shower area carefully, including door openings, wall clearances and the location of taps or screens. Height-adjustable models should be set level, with every adjustment point fully engaged. Wall-mounted products require installation into a structurally suitable surface by a competent installer. Keep rubber feet or contact surfaces clean and inspect the seat regularly so it remains stable during everyday use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe maximum user weight is 130 kg when the seat is correctly installed in suitable wall construction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size is the seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe sitting surface is approximately 80 cm wide x 32 cm deep.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far does it project when lowered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe overall depth is approximately 45 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far does it project when folded up?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 13 cm from the wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the difference between this and the padded Viking shower seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis standard version has a wipe-clean PVC seat top. The padded version adds a sealed waterproof cushioned surface while retaining the folding wall-mounted design.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the frame made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eStainless steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it fold against the wall?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The seat folds upward to reduce the space it occupies when not required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I install it myself?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eProfessional installation is recommended. The wall construction and fixings must be suitable for the load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWill it work on any bathroom wall?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. A structurally suitable mounting surface is required. Wall linings alone may not provide adequate support.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs it freestanding?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. It is a wall-mounted shower seat and depends on correct structural fixing.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there a manual?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Viking Folding Shower Seat manual is linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the fixings be checked over time?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Inspect the seat and installation regularly and stop using it if there is movement, corrosion, damage or looseness.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Viking Folding Shower Seat available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This shower seat is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 × 32 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFolded depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat surface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003ePVC\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Viking","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676850757707,"sku":"CUB-VKGFUSEAT","price":489.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/9e3a5b01-e674b4_79f2dca21c9b4dc7b6feae96f3449fe8_mv2.jpg?v=1754901815"},{"product_id":"viking-folding-padded-shower-seat","title":"Viking Folding Padded Shower Seat","description":"\u003ch2\u003eViking Folding Padded Shower Seat\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eViking Folding Padded Shower Seat\u003c\/strong\u003e is a wall-mounted shower seat with a 304-grade stainless-steel frame and sealed waterproof padded surface. It folds upward when not in use, leaving approximately \u003cstrong\u003e13 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e projection from the wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePadded or Standard Viking Shower Seat?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the \u003cstrong\u003ePadded Shower Seat\u003c\/strong\u003e when extra cushioning is important. The \u003ca href=\"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/products\/viking-folding-shower-seat\"\u003estandard Viking Folding Shower Seat\u003c\/a\u003e uses a simpler wipe-clean PVC top, while this model adds a sealed waterproof padded vinyl surface without changing the overall wall-mounted folding concept.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e130 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eWall-mounted folding design.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e304-grade stainless-steel frame.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eSealed waterproof padded vinyl seat.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e80 cm wide x 32 cm deep\u003c\/strong\u003e seat.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e45 cm overall depth\u003c\/strong\u003e when lowered.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eApprox. \u003cstrong\u003e13 cm folded depth\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eEasy-clean wet-area upholstery.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eListed to NZ Standard S4121 compliance.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eMust be installed by a suitably qualified person into sound wall construction.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Viking_Folding_Shower_Seat.pdf?v=1756893958\" target=\"_blank\" title=\"Viking Folding Padded Shower Seat Instructions\"\u003eViking Folding Padded Shower Seat Instructions\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eInstallation Matters\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wall and fixings carry the user's load. Installation should be completed by a suitably qualified person using fixings appropriate to the wall construction, and the seat should not be used if there is any movement or damage.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eComfortable Positioning in the Shower\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eViking Folding Padded Shower Seat can make washing more manageable by providing a defined seated position and reducing the time a person needs to remain standing on a wet surface. When choosing a shower seat, consider the user’s preferred transfer direction, the amount of trunk or arm support required, and whether a caregiver needs room to assist from the front or side.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasure the shower area carefully, including door openings, wall clearances and the location of taps or screens. Height-adjustable models should be set level, with every adjustment point fully engaged. Wall-mounted products require installation into a structurally suitable surface by a competent installer. Keep rubber feet or contact surfaces clean and inspect the seat regularly so it remains stable during everyday use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe maximum user weight is 130 kg when correctly installed into suitable wall construction.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size is the padded seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe sitting surface is approximately 80 cm wide x 32 cm deep.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far does it project when lowered?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe overall depth is approximately 45 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow far does it project when folded?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eApproximately 13 cm from the wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow is this different from the standard Viking Folding Shower Seat?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThis version adds a sealed waterproof padded vinyl sitting surface. The standard model uses a simpler wipe-clean PVC seat top.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the frame made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003e304-grade stainless steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be installed on any bathroom wall?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo. The wall must be structurally sound and capable of supporting the seat and user through suitable fixings.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I install it myself?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eProfessional installation is recommended because the wall structure and fixings determine the safety of the installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it fold up when not needed?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It folds toward the wall to reduce obstruction in the shower area.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should it be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eWipe the sealed seat and stainless frame using a mild cleaning method suitable for bathroom equipment, then rinse or dry as appropriate.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eShould the seat be inspected?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Check the seat, hinge, frame and wall fixings regularly and stop using it if anything becomes loose or damaged.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs there an instruction sheet?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Viking Folding Padded Shower Seat instructions are linked above.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Viking Folding Padded Shower Seat available for delivery across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. This shower seat is available for delivery throughout New Zealand.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e130 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e80 × 32 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eOverall depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e45 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFolded depth\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e13 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e304-grade stainless steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat surface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eSealed waterproof padded vinyl\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Viking","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676850856011,"sku":"CUB-VKGPADSEAT","price":890.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/0abf4d6f-e674b4_9243f054b50e4836ba107273fa850728_mv2.jpg?v=1754901814"},{"product_id":"wall-mounted-folding-bath-seat","title":"Wall Mounted Folding Bath Seat","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Wall Mounted Folding Bath Seat\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Wall Mounted Folding Bath Seat\u003c\/strong\u003e provides a fixed fold-away seating surface for suitable bathing areas. Its lightweight aluminium frame is coated in antibacterial, anti-aging Nylon, with a non-slip seat surface and Stainless Steel wall-mounting plates.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe seat measures approximately \u003cstrong\u003e80 × 38.8 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e and has a published maximum user weight of \u003cstrong\u003e120 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. A support leg helps transfer load to the floor when the seat is lowered, while the folding design allows the seat to sit closer to the wall when not in use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall-mounted folding bath seat\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApproximately 80 × 38.8 cm seat\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e120 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightweight aluminium frame\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame coated in \u003cstrong\u003eantibacterial, anti-aging Nylon\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-slip seat surface\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSupport leg\u003c\/strong\u003e for the lowered seating position.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStainless Steel wall-mounting plates\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFolds toward the wall when not required.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Wall Mounted Folding Bath Seat?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe larger fold-away seating surface provides a fixed bathing support option without permanently occupying the same floor space as a freestanding seat. Its wall mounting and support leg must work together, so correct structural installation and floor contact are important parts of the setup.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eComfortable Positioning in the Shower\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWall Mounted Folding Bath Seat can make washing more manageable by providing a defined seated position and reducing the time a person needs to remain standing on a wet surface. When choosing a shower seat, consider the user’s preferred transfer direction, the amount of trunk or arm support required, and whether a caregiver needs room to assist from the front or side.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasure the shower area carefully, including door openings, wall clearances and the location of taps or screens. Height-adjustable models should be set level, with every adjustment point fully engaged. Wall-mounted products require installation into a structurally suitable surface by a competent installer. Keep rubber feet or contact surfaces clean and inspect the seat regularly so it remains stable during everyday use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published seat size is approximately 80 × 38.8 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published maximum user weight is 120 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the seat fold away?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. It folds toward the wall when it is not required.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the frame made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe frame is lightweight aluminium with an antibacterial, anti-aging Nylon coating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the seat surface non-slip?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The seating surface is designed with a non-slip finish for suitable bathing environments.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a support leg?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A support leg helps support the seat when it is lowered for use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the wall plates made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wall-mounting plates are Stainless Steel.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat size are the mounting plates?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published mounting-plate size is approximately 20 × 8 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it comply with NZS 4121?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Wall Mounted Folding Bath Seat is published as NZS 4121 compliant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhere should the support leg sit?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe leg needs firm, appropriate floor contact when the seat is lowered. The final position should be confirmed during installation so the seat is correctly supported.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it need professional installation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Wall-mounted bath seating requires secure structural fixing. Installation should be completed by a suitably qualified person using fixings appropriate for the wall construction and intended load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be mounted onto wall lining alone?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo assumption should be made that wall lining alone provides adequate support. The installer should confirm suitable structural fixing before installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I know whether it will fit my bath area?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCompare the 80 × 38.8 cm seat size and mounting arrangement with the available wall and floor space, including the support-leg position when the seat is lowered.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Wall Mounted Folding Bath Seat is available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 80 × 38.8 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eLightweight aluminium with antibacterial, anti-aging Nylon coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat surface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNon-slip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSupport\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWall mounting plus support leg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMounting plates\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless Steel, approximately 20 × 8 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Default Title","offer_id":41676851150923,"sku":"GF-FUBTHSEAT","price":950.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/851c4e66-e674b4_dde0c72693dc4e79b2928e293c0b9122_mv2.png?v=1754901815"},{"product_id":"wall-mounted-folding-shower-seat","title":"Wall Mounted Folding Shower Seat","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Wall Mounted Folding Shower Seat\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Wall Mounted Folding Shower Seat\u003c\/strong\u003e provides a fixed shower seat that folds against the wall when it is not required. It uses a lightweight aluminium frame coated in antibacterial, anti-aging Nylon, with Stainless Steel mounting plates and a non-slip seat surface with drainage gaps.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCurrent MoveSmart variants are the \u003cstrong\u003e400 model\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e845 model\u003c\/strong\u003e. Both have a published maximum user weight of \u003cstrong\u003e120 kg\u003c\/strong\u003e. The 400 model has an approximately \u003cstrong\u003e38.8 × 40 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e seat, while the 845 model has an approximately \u003cstrong\u003e85 × 44.5 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e seat.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWall-mounted folding design\u003c\/strong\u003e for space-efficient shower seating.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e400 and 845 current MoveSmart models\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e120 kg maximum user weight\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eLightweight aluminium frame\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eFrame coated in \u003cstrong\u003eantibacterial, anti-aging Nylon\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStainless Steel wall-mounting plates\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNon-slip seat surface\u003c\/strong\u003e with drainage gaps.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eSupport leg with Nylon tip\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12-month warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Wall Mounted Folding Shower Seat?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eA wall-mounted seat provides a permanent shower seating option without requiring a freestanding stool to be moved in and out. When folded, the seat occupies less floor space, while the support leg and wall mounting work together when the seat is lowered. Correct structural installation is essential for the seat to perform as intended.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eComfortable Positioning in the Shower\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eWall Mounted Folding Shower Seat can make washing more manageable by providing a defined seated position and reducing the time a person needs to remain standing on a wet surface. When choosing a shower seat, consider the user’s preferred transfer direction, the amount of trunk or arm support required, and whether a caregiver needs room to assist from the front or side.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eMeasure the shower area carefully, including door openings, wall clearances and the location of taps or screens. Height-adjustable models should be set level, with every adjustment point fully engaged. Wall-mounted products require installation into a structurally suitable surface by a competent installer. Keep rubber feet or contact surfaces clean and inspect the seat regularly so it remains stable during everyday use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat models are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCurrent MoveSmart variants are the 400 model and the 845 model.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat size of the 400 model?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published seat size is approximately 38.8 × 40 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the seat size of the 845 model?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current published seat size is approximately 85 × 44.5 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the maximum user weight?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth models have a published maximum user weight of 120 kg.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the seat fold away?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The seat folds toward the wall when it is not required, helping free up shower floor space.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the frame made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe frame is lightweight aluminium with an antibacterial, anti-aging Nylon coating.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the mounting plates made from?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe wall-mounting plates are Stainless Steel and measure approximately 20 × 8 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the seat surface drain water?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The non-slip seat incorporates drainage gaps so water can pass through rather than collecting on the surface.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it have a support leg?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A support leg is fitted and uses a Nylon tip where it contacts the floor.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is the floor-to-seat height of the 845 model?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe current published floor-to-top-of-seat height for the 845 model is approximately 52 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it comply with NZS 4121?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Wall Mounted Folding Shower Seat range is published as NZS 4121 compliant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it need professional installation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A wall-mounted shower seat requires secure structural fixing. Installation should be completed by a suitably qualified person using fixings appropriate for the wall construction and intended load.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be mounted directly onto wall lining alone?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo assumption should be made that wall lining alone is adequate. The installer should confirm suitable structural support and the correct mounting method before installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published warranty is 12 months.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Goldfern Wall Mounted Folding Shower Seats are available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e400 Model\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003e845 Model\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat size\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 38.8 × 40 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 85 × 44.5 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMaximum user weight\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e120 kg\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMounting plate\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 20 × 8 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 20 × 8 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFloor-to-seat height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e—\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 52 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFrame\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eAluminium with antibacterial, anti-aging Nylon coating\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eMounting plates\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eStainless Steel\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSeat surface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eNon-slip with drainage gaps\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd colspan=\"2\"\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"400mm","offer_id":41676851249227,"sku":"GF-WMFUSHWSEAT400","price":760.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"845mm","offer_id":41676851281995,"sku":"GF-WMFUSHWSEAT800","price":835.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Wall-mounted-fold-up-shower-seat.png?v=1783421849"},{"product_id":"t-shaped-grab-rail","title":"T-Shaped Grab Rail","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern T-Shaped Grab Rail\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern T-Shaped Grab Rail\u003c\/strong\u003e combines vertical and horizontal gripping sections in a fixed shower-support layout. A built-in \u003cstrong\u003eshower-head holder\u003c\/strong\u003e adds practical functionality, while the textured, water-resistant rail surface is designed to provide a more secure handhold.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rail is available in \u003cstrong\u003eStainless Steel\u003c\/strong\u003e or \u003cstrong\u003eantibacterial Nylon\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Nylon version uses an aluminium-reinforced core and has anti-UV and anti-aging surface properties. Published dimensions are approximately \u003cstrong\u003e75 cm total length\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003e90 cm total height\u003c\/strong\u003e, and the range is \u003cstrong\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eT-shaped fixed grab rail\u003c\/strong\u003e with horizontal and vertical handhold sections.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eIntegrated shower-head holder\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStainless Steel or antibacterial Nylon\u003c\/strong\u003e finishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTextured, water-resistant surface\u003c\/strong\u003e designed for grip.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNylon version has an \u003cstrong\u003ealuminium-reinforced core\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNylon surface includes \u003cstrong\u003eanti-UV and anti-aging properties\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApproximately 75 cm total length\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eApproximately 90 cm total height\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12-month warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Grab_Rail_Care_Maintenance.pdf?v=1756718425\" title=\"Goldfern Grab Rail Care and Maintenance Guide\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eGoldfern Grab Rail Care and Maintenance Guide\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern T-Shaped Grab Rail?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe T-shaped layout provides more than one gripping direction in a single fixed shower rail, while the integrated shower-head holder combines two bathroom functions without adding a separate holder. Correct structural installation is essential so the rail is securely anchored for its intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePosition and Installation Matter\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eT-Shaped Grab Rail can provide a reliable handhold only when its location matches the movement the user actually makes. Consider whether support is needed while approaching, turning, lowering, standing or stepping, and position the rail so it can be reached without over-stretching. The most useful angle and height can differ between a toilet, shower, bath or hallway.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstallation must suit the wall structure and the loads placed on the rail; wall lining alone may not provide adequate support. A competent installer should select appropriate fixings and confirm the mounting surface. An occupational therapist can help determine placement where the user has complex balance, strength or transfer needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is a T-shaped grab rail?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt combines a vertical rail section with a horizontal gripping section, providing more than one hand position within the same fixed installation.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it include a shower-head holder?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. A shower-head holder is integrated into the rail.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe rail is available in Stainless Steel and antibacterial Nylon.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is different about the Nylon version?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Nylon version has an aluminium-reinforced core with an antibacterial surface that also includes anti-UV and anti-aging properties.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat are the published dimensions?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published overall dimensions are approximately 75 cm total length and 90 cm total height.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the surface designed for wet areas?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The rail has a water-resistant textured surface designed to improve grip in suitable shower and bathroom locations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it comply with NZS 4121?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern T-Shaped Grab Rail is published as NZS 4121 compliant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the shower-head holder be used as the main handhold?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe grab rail itself provides the support surfaces. The shower-head holder is an accessory feature and should be used only for its intended purpose.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the rail need professional installation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Grab rails require secure structural fixing. Installation should be completed by a suitably qualified person using fixings appropriate for the wall construction and intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be installed onto wall lining alone?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo assumption should be made that wall lining alone provides adequate support. The installer should confirm sound structural fixing and select the appropriate fixing system.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should I choose the mounting position?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe mounting position should suit the user's reach, intended movement and shower layout while meeting applicable accessibility and installation requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the rail be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow the Goldfern Grab Rail Care and Maintenance Guide linked above for cleaning and ongoing care.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published warranty is 12 months.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern T-Shaped Grab Rail is available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDesign\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eT-shaped fixed shower grab rail\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinishes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless Steel; antibacterial Nylon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShower-head holder\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eIntegrated\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal length\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 75 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eTotal height\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eApproximately 90 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSurface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTextured and water-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNylon construction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium-reinforced core with antibacterial, anti-UV and anti-aging surface properties\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Stainless Steel","offer_id":41676851216459,"sku":"GF-TSHWRRLSS","price":275.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon","offer_id":41676851183691,"sku":"GF-TSHWRRLNY","price":540.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/2de17ac3-e674b4_a9196b60ff234dcdb9095bb88ff01067_mv2.png?v=1754901815"},{"product_id":"straight-grab-rail","title":"Straight Grab Rail","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern Straight Grab Rail\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern Straight Grab Rail\u003c\/strong\u003e provides a fixed handhold for suitable areas around the home, including bathrooms and other wet environments. Its water-resistant, textured non-slip surface is designed to improve grip, and the range is \u003cstrong\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eTwo finishes are available: \u003cstrong\u003eStainless Steel\u003c\/strong\u003e and \u003cstrong\u003eantibacterial Nylon\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Nylon version also uses an aluminium-reinforced core and a surface designed with anti-UV and anti-aging properties. Your current MoveSmart range offers \u003cstrong\u003enine lengths in each finish\u003c\/strong\u003e: 30, 40, 45, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 and 120 cm.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eWater-resistant, non-slip surface\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStainless Steel or antibacterial Nylon\u003c\/strong\u003e finishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNylon version has an \u003cstrong\u003ealuminium-reinforced core\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNylon surface includes \u003cstrong\u003eanti-UV and anti-aging properties\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNine current lengths per finish\u003c\/strong\u003e from 30 cm to 120 cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with the \u003cstrong\u003eFlat End for Grab Rails\u003c\/strong\u003e attachment where a suitable adjacent-wall installation requires it.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12-month warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Grab_Rail_Care_Maintenance.pdf?v=1756718425\" title=\"Goldfern Grab Rail Care and Maintenance Guide\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eGoldfern Grab Rail Care and Maintenance Guide\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern Straight Grab Rail?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe broad range of lengths makes it easier to select a rail for the available wall space and intended hand position, while the two finish choices allow the installation to be matched to different environments. Correct wall fixing is essential: the rail should be installed by a suitably qualified person into a sound structure using fixings appropriate for the wall type.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePosition and Installation Matter\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eStraight Grab Rail can provide a reliable handhold only when its location matches the movement the user actually makes. Consider whether support is needed while approaching, turning, lowering, standing or stepping, and position the rail so it can be reached without over-stretching. The most useful angle and height can differ between a toilet, shower, bath or hallway.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstallation must suit the wall structure and the loads placed on the rail; wall lining alone may not provide adequate support. A competent installer should select appropriate fixings and confirm the mounting surface. An occupational therapist can help determine placement where the user has complex balance, strength or transfer needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Straight Grab Rail is available in Stainless Steel and antibacterial Nylon.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat lengths are currently available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCurrent MoveSmart variants include 30, 40, 45, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100 and 120 cm lengths in both finishes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the rail suitable for bathrooms?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The range has a water-resistant, non-slip surface and is designed for suitable wet and dry areas.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is different about the Nylon finish?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Nylon version has an aluminium-reinforced core and a surface with antibacterial, anti-UV and anti-aging properties.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the Stainless Steel version textured?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe range is designed with a textured surface to improve grip and stability.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the grab rail comply with NZS 4121?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Straight Grab Rail range is published as NZS 4121 compliant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the Flat End attachment be used with this rail?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Flat End for Grab Rails attachment is compatible where one end of the rail needs to connect to a suitable adjacent wall.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the rail need professional installation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Grab rails need secure structural fixing. Installation should be completed by a suitably qualified person using fixings appropriate for the wall construction and intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan I simply screw it into wall lining?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo assumption should be made that wall lining alone provides adequate support. The installer should confirm sound structural fixing behind or within the wall and choose the correct fixing method.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I care for the grab rail?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow the Goldfern Grab Rail Care and Maintenance Guide linked above for cleaning and ongoing care.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I choose the correct length?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eChoose the length according to the available wall space, intended hand position and installation requirements. If the rail forms part of an accessible bathroom layout, the overall layout should also meet the relevant design requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published warranty is 12 months.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Goldfern Straight Grab Rails are available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinishes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless Steel; antibacterial Nylon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrent MoveSmart lengths\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e30, 40, 45, 60, 70, 80, 90, 100, 120 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSurface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eWater-resistant and textured for grip\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNylon construction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium-reinforced core with antibacterial, anti-UV and anti-aging surface properties\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatible accessory\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat End for Grab Rails attachment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 300mm","offer_id":41676851511371,"sku":"GF-SGRBSS300","price":59.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 400mm","offer_id":41676851839051,"sku":"GF-SGRBSS400","price":59.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 450mm","offer_id":41676851773515,"sku":"GF-SGRBSS450","price":69.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 600mm","offer_id":41676851347531,"sku":"GF-SGRBSS600","price":79.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 700mm","offer_id":41676851544139,"sku":"GF-SGRBSS700","price":85.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 800mm","offer_id":41676851478603,"sku":"GF-SGRBSS800","price":95.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 900mm","offer_id":41676851413067,"sku":"GF-SGRBSS900","price":105.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 1000mm","offer_id":41676851871819,"sku":"GF-SGRBSS1000","price":115.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 1200mm","offer_id":41676851707979,"sku":"GF-SGRBSS1200","price":135.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 300mm","offer_id":41676851609675,"sku":"GF-SGRBNY300","price":85.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 400mm","offer_id":41676851675211,"sku":"GF-SGRBNY400","price":59.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 450mm","offer_id":41676851576907,"sku":"GF-SGRBNY450","price":105.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 600mm","offer_id":41676851740747,"sku":"GF-SGRBNY600","price":125.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 700mm","offer_id":41676851314763,"sku":"GF-SGRBNY700","price":135.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 800mm","offer_id":41676851445835,"sku":"GF-SGRBNY800","price":145.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 900mm","offer_id":41676851380299,"sku":"GF-SGRBNY900","price":159.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 1000mm","offer_id":41676851642443,"sku":"GF-SGRBNY1000","price":175.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 1200mm","offer_id":41676851806283,"sku":"GF-SGRBNY1200","price":190.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/6f24c11f-e674b4_86ae986fe42b4866bf93d9e641792fe7_mv2.png?v=1754901815"},{"product_id":"l-shaped-grab-rail","title":"L Shaped Grab Rail","description":"\u003ch2\u003eGoldfern L-Shaped Grab Rail\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe \u003cstrong\u003eGoldfern L-Shaped Grab Rail\u003c\/strong\u003e provides a fixed two-direction handhold for suitable bathroom, shower and other support locations. Its \u003cstrong\u003e90° shape\u003c\/strong\u003e offers both horizontal and vertical gripping sections, with a textured, water-resistant surface designed to improve grip.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eCurrent MoveSmart variants are available in \u003cstrong\u003eStainless Steel\u003c\/strong\u003e or \u003cstrong\u003eantibacterial Nylon\u003c\/strong\u003e, with three sizes in each finish: \u003cstrong\u003e60 × 60 cm, 75 × 75 cm and 90 × 75 cm\u003c\/strong\u003e. The Nylon version uses an aluminium-reinforced core and has anti-UV and anti-aging surface properties. The range is \u003cstrong\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eKey Features\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cul\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e90° L-shaped design\u003c\/strong\u003e with horizontal and vertical handhold sections.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eStainless Steel or antibacterial Nylon\u003c\/strong\u003e finishes.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eThree current sizes per finish:\u003c\/strong\u003e 60 × 60 cm, 75 × 75 cm and 90 × 75 cm.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eTextured, water-resistant surface\u003c\/strong\u003e designed for grip.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNylon version has an \u003cstrong\u003ealuminium-reinforced core\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eNylon surface includes \u003cstrong\u003eanti-UV and anti-aging properties\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003eCompatible with the Goldfern \u003cstrong\u003eFlat End for Grab Rails\u003c\/strong\u003e attachment where appropriate.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003cli\u003e\n\u003cstrong\u003e12-month warranty\u003c\/strong\u003e.\u003c\/li\u003e\n\u003c\/ul\u003e\u003cp\u003e\u003ca href=\"https:\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/Grab_Rail_Care_Maintenance.pdf?v=1756718425\" title=\"Goldfern Grab Rail Care and Maintenance Guide\" target=\"_blank\"\u003eGoldfern Grab Rail Care and Maintenance Guide\u003c\/a\u003e\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eWhy Choose the Goldfern L-Shaped Grab Rail?\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe 90° format provides two gripping directions from one fixed rail, making it useful where a user benefits from both horizontal and vertical support points. Multiple lengths and two finish options make it easier to match the rail to the available wall space and bathroom layout.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003ePosition and Installation Matter\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003cp\u003eL Shaped Grab Rail can provide a reliable handhold only when its location matches the movement the user actually makes. Consider whether support is needed while approaching, turning, lowering, standing or stepping, and position the rail so it can be reached without over-stretching. The most useful angle and height can differ between a toilet, shower, bath or hallway.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003cp\u003eInstallation must suit the wall structure and the loads placed on the rail; wall lining alone may not provide adequate support. A competent installer should select appropriate fixings and confirm the mounting surface. An occupational therapist can help determine placement where the user has complex balance, strength or transfer needs.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch2\u003eFrequently Asked Questions\u003c\/h2\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat shape is this grab rail?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eIt is an L-shaped rail with a 90° bend, providing both horizontal and vertical gripping sections.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat finishes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eCurrent MoveSmart variants are available in Stainless Steel and antibacterial Nylon.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat sizes are available?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eBoth finishes are currently offered in 60 × 60 cm, 75 × 75 cm and 90 × 75 cm sizes.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat is different about the Nylon version?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe Nylon version has an aluminium-reinforced core with an antibacterial surface that also includes anti-UV and anti-aging properties.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eIs the surface designed for wet areas?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The range uses a water-resistant textured surface designed to provide a more secure handhold in suitable wet and dry locations.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes the rail comply with NZS 4121?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern L-Shaped Grab Rail range is published as NZS 4121 compliant.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be installed in a shower?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes, provided the location, wall construction and fixing method are suitable for a grab rail and the installation is completed correctly.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eDoes it need professional installation?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Grab rails require secure structural fixing. Installation should be completed by a suitably qualified person using fixings appropriate for the wall construction and intended use.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be fixed only to wall lining?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eNo assumption should be made that wall lining alone provides adequate support. The installer should confirm a sound structural fixing point and select the appropriate fixing method.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan the Flat End accessory be used with this rail?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. The Goldfern Flat End for Grab Rails attachment can be used where a suitable adjacent-wall installation requires it.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow do I choose the right size?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eSelect the size according to the available wall space, intended hand position and overall bathroom layout. For accessible bathroom installations, the complete layout should also meet the relevant design requirements.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eHow should the grab rail be cleaned?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eFollow the Goldfern Grab Rail Care and Maintenance Guide linked above for cleaning and ongoing care.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eWhat warranty is included?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eThe published warranty is 12 months.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ch3\u003eCan it be delivered across New Zealand?\u003c\/h3\u003e\u003cp\u003eYes. Goldfern L-Shaped Grab Rails are available to ship NZ-wide from MoveSmart.\u003c\/p\u003e\u003ctable\u003e\u003ctbody\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFeature\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eDetails\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eShape\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e90° L-shaped\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eFinishes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eStainless Steel; antibacterial Nylon\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCurrent sizes\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e60 × 60 cm; 75 × 75 cm; 90 × 75 cm\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eSurface\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eTextured and water-resistant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eNylon construction\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eAluminium-reinforced core with antibacterial, anti-UV and anti-aging surface properties\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eStandard\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eNZS 4121 compliant\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eCompatible accessory\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003eFlat End for Grab Rails attachment\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003ctr\u003e\n\u003cth\u003eWarranty\u003c\/th\u003e\n\u003ctd\u003e12 months\u003c\/td\u003e\n\u003c\/tr\u003e\n\u003c\/tbody\u003e\u003c\/table\u003e","brand":"Goldfern","offers":[{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 600mm x 600mm","offer_id":41676851970123,"sku":"GF-LGRBSS600","price":185.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 750mm x 750mm","offer_id":41676851937355,"sku":"GF-LGRBSS750","price":205.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Stainless Steel \/ 900mm x 750mm","offer_id":41676851904587,"sku":"GF-LGRBSS900","price":220.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 600mm x 600mm","offer_id":41676852002891,"sku":"GF-LGRBNY600","price":260.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 750mm x 750mm","offer_id":41676852035659,"sku":"GF-LGRBNY750","price":305.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true},{"title":"Nylon \/ 900mm x 750mm","offer_id":41676852068427,"sku":"GF-LGRBNY900","price":185.0,"currency_code":"NZD","in_stock":true}],"thumbnail_url":"\/\/cdn.shopify.com\/s\/files\/1\/0628\/0796\/5771\/files\/41186b8a-e674b4_8994eb0ecc4347ef80376678c8a445a9_mv2.png?v=1754901815"}],"url":"https:\/\/movesmart.nz\/collections\/all.oembed","provider":"MoveSmart Mobility Equipment ","version":"1.0","type":"link"}